1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5185 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5259 \begin_inset Index idx
5262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5272 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5273 time for the differences.
5282 are identical except for one difference:
5286 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5295 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5298 \begin_layout Standard
5299 Here's an example of the
5312 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5314 See – no indentation!
5318 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5319 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5320 the other paragraph.
5323 \begin_layout Standard
5324 Here's another example, this time in the
5331 \begin_layout Quotation
5337 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5338 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5339 the first line, then
5343 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5347 you were quoting other text.
5350 \begin_layout Quotation
5351 Here's a new paragraph.
5352 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5353 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5356 \begin_layout Standard
5357 As the examples show,
5361 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5362 They should put quotes in the
5367 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5371 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5380 \begin_inset Index idx
5383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5390 \begin_inset Index idx
5393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5411 \begin_layout Standard
5416 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5422 \begin_inset Newline newline
5425 Which I did not rehearse!
5429 It could be much worse.
5430 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5432 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5433 indented a bit more than the first.
5434 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5440 \begin_inset Newline newline
5443 And make things look fine
5444 \begin_inset Newline newline
5450 arg "newline-insert newline"
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5461 does not indent both margins.
5462 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5463 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5470 arg "newline-insert newline"
5476 \begin_layout Subsection
5478 \begin_inset Index idx
5481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5497 \begin_layout Standard
5498 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5508 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5517 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5518 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5519 describing some general features of all four of them.
5522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5527 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5529 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5538 reset the environment to
5542 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5543 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5544 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5548 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5552 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5560 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5561 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5563 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5564 you read all of section
5565 \begin_inset space ~
5569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5571 reference "sec:Nesting"
5578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5584 \begin_inset Index idx
5587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5603 \begin_layout Standard
5604 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5608 paragraph environment.
5609 It has the following properties:
5612 \begin_layout Itemize
5613 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5617 \begin_layout Itemize
5618 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5621 \begin_layout Itemize
5622 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5626 \begin_layout Itemize
5627 The items can have any length.
5628 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5629 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5636 \begin_layout Itemize
5641 environment inside another
5645 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5649 \begin_layout Itemize
5650 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5653 \begin_layout Itemize
5654 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5657 \begin_layout Itemize
5659 \begin_inset space ~
5663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5665 reference "sec:Nesting"
5669 for a full explanation of nesting.
5673 \begin_layout Standard
5674 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5683 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5686 \begin_layout Standard
5687 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5688 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5692 The label for the first level
5696 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5701 The label for the second level is a dash.
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5710 \begin_layout Itemize
5711 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5716 Back out to the third level.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5721 Back to the second level.
5725 \begin_layout Itemize
5726 Back to the outermost level.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 These are the default labels for an
5735 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5737 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5740 dialog in the submenu
5745 \begin_inset Index idx
5748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5754 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5757 \begin_layout Standard
5758 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5759 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5761 \begin_inset space ~
5765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5767 reference "sec:Nesting"
5774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5792 name "sec:Enumerate"
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5804 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5805 It has these properties:
5808 \begin_layout Enumerate
5809 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Enumerate
5814 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5818 \begin_layout Enumerate
5819 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 environment resets the counter to one.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5843 \begin_layout Enumerate
5844 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5845 Items can have any length.
5848 \begin_layout Enumerate
5849 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Standard
5870 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5871 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5879 The first level of an
5883 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5887 \begin_layout Enumerate
5888 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5892 \begin_layout Enumerate
5893 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5907 \begin_layout Enumerate
5908 Back to the third level
5912 \begin_layout Enumerate
5913 Back to the second level.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5918 Back to the outermost level.
5921 \begin_layout Standard
5922 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5926 environment, see section
5927 \begin_inset space ~
5931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5933 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5938 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5941 \begin_layout Standard
5942 There is more to nesting
5946 environments than we've stated here.
5947 You should read section
5948 \begin_inset space ~
5952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5954 reference "sec:Nesting"
5958 to learn more about nesting.
5961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5980 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5984 list has no fixed label.
5985 Instead, LyX uses the first
5986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5993 of the first line as the label.
5997 \begin_layout Description
5998 Example: This is an example of the
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6006 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6010 \begin_layout Standard
6012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6019 it is meant that the first usage of the
6023 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6025 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6033 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6038 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6039 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6041 \begin_inset space ~
6047 \begin_inset space ~
6051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6053 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6057 for more information.) Here is an example:
6060 \begin_layout Description
6062 \begin_inset space ~
6065 Example: This one shows how to use a
6068 \begin_inset space ~
6080 \begin_layout Description
6081 Usage: You should use the
6085 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6086 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6088 It's not a good idea to use a
6092 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6093 You're better off using
6105 paragraphs into them.
6108 \begin_layout Description
6109 Nesting: You can nest
6113 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6117 \begin_layout Standard
6118 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6119 them from the first line.
6122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6124 \begin_inset Index idx
6127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6136 \begin_layout Standard
6141 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6153 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6155 Here are its properties:
6158 \begin_layout Labeling
6159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6161 \begin_inset space ~
6164 labels LyX uses the first
6165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6172 of each line as the item label.
6177 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6178 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6179 space as described above.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6184 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6185 the body of the item text.
6186 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6187 label width plus a little extra space.
6191 \begin_layout Labeling
6192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6194 \begin_inset space ~
6197 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6199 If the label width is larger, the label
6200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6207 into the first line.
6208 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6209 margin of the rest of the item text.
6212 \begin_layout Labeling
6213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6215 \begin_inset space ~
6218 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6223 environment has the same left margin.
6224 \begin_inset Newline newline
6227 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6230 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6232 \begin_inset space ~
6237 dialog (toolbar button
6240 arg "layout-paragraph"
6247 \begin_inset space ~
6252 determines the default label width.
6253 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6262 multiple times instead.
6263 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6272 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6280 every time you alter a label in a
6285 \begin_inset Newline newline
6288 The predefined default width is the length of
6289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Standard
6308 list the same way as the
6312 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6318 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6322 \begin_layout Standard
6327 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6328 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sec:Nesting"
6340 to learn about nesting.
6343 \begin_layout Standard
6344 There is yet another feature of the
6348 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6350 You can use additional
6354 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6359 are documented in section
6360 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6366 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6371 Here are some examples:
6374 \begin_layout Labeling
6375 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6376 Left The default for
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6385 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6392 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6395 \begin_layout Labeling
6396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6408 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6411 \begin_layout Subsection
6413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6415 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6420 \begin_inset Index idx
6423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6432 \begin_layout Standard
6433 The features described in this section require that the module
6435 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6437 is loaded in the document settings.
6438 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6443 \begin_inset Index idx
6446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6447 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6456 Custom Enumerate Lists
6457 \begin_inset Index idx
6460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6461 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6469 \begin_layout Standard
6471 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6474 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6477 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6478 There you add the command
6481 \begin_layout Standard
6489 \begin_layout Standard
6490 in TeX Code (shortcut
6500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6501 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6508 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6521 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6528 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6529 For capital Roman numerals replace
6541 in the command above.
6542 For Arabic numerals use
6550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6557 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6582 You can only number 26
6583 \begin_inset space ~
6586 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6594 \begin_layout Standard
6595 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6596 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6599 \begin_layout Standard
6600 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6633 \begin_layout Enumerate
6634 \begin_inset Argument 1
6637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6660 \begin_layout Enumerate
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6666 \begin_inset Argument 1
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Enumerate
6694 \begin_inset Argument 1
6697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6724 For this list these commands were used:
6727 \begin_layout Standard
6738 \begin_inset Newline newline
6746 \begin_inset Newline newline
6754 \begin_inset Newline newline
6764 \begin_layout Standard
6771 makes the label emphasized and
6780 \begin_layout Standard
6781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6790 lists until you change the definition.
6798 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6800 \begin_inset Index idx
6803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6804 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6812 \begin_layout Standard
6813 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6816 \begin_layout Enumerate
6817 \begin_inset Argument 1
6820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6839 \begin_inset Note Note
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 goes back to default numbering
6851 \begin_layout Enumerate
6855 \begin_layout Standard
6859 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6863 \begin_layout Standard
6864 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6869 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6870 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6890 \begin_layout Standard
6891 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6893 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6894 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6895 of a normal enumeration.
6896 There, insert the command
6899 \begin_layout Standard
6905 \begin_layout Standard
6910 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6914 \begin_layout Enumerate
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6923 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6927 \begin_inset Argument 1
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6946 This enumeration starts at 4
6949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6951 \begin_inset Index idx
6954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6964 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6966 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6969 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 \begin_layout Itemize
6974 with standard spacing
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6980 Add there the command
6984 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6987 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_inset Argument 1
6991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7010 \begin_layout Itemize
7014 \begin_layout Itemize
7018 \begin_layout Standard
7019 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7025 \begin_inset Index idx
7028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7029 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7035 For more information see its documentation,
7036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7048 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7049 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7053 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7056 \begin_layout Enumerate
7057 \begin_inset Argument 1
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7068 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7081 \begin_layout Enumerate
7082 with negative indentation
7085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7086 Further Customization
7087 \begin_inset Index idx
7090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7091 Lists ! Customization
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 You can also change the style of description lists.
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 changes the description label font, the command
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7120 \begin_layout Standard
7121 sets the list style.
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 An example where the command
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 itshape, style=nextline
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7140 \begin_layout Description
7142 \begin_inset space ~
7146 \begin_inset Argument 1
7149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7155 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7157 itshape, style=nextline
7167 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7168 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7172 \begin_layout Description
7174 \begin_inset space ~
7177 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7178 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7179 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7199 For more information see its documentation
7200 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7209 \begin_layout Subsection
7211 \begin_inset Index idx
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7231 \begin_inset space ~
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7240 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7248 \begin_inset space ~
7254 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7255 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7256 In contrast, you can use the
7263 \begin_inset space ~
7268 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7269 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7273 \begin_layout Standard
7274 Of course, you're not limited to using
7281 \begin_inset space ~
7290 \begin_inset space ~
7295 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7296 some European academic papers.
7299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7303 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7315 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7316 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7320 \begin_inset space ~
7325 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7326 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7327 Here's an example of each:
7330 \begin_layout Right Address
7332 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 \begin_inset Newline newline
7340 \begin_inset Newline newline
7343 When is it? What is today?
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_inset space ~
7356 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7357 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7358 Here's an example of the
7365 \begin_layout Address
7367 \begin_inset Newline newline
7370 Where do I send this
7371 \begin_inset Newline newline
7374 Your post office and country
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7378 As you can see, both
7385 \begin_inset space ~
7390 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7395 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7401 This makes sense, since
7409 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7410 Thus, you have to use
7417 arg "newline-insert newline"
7422 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7423 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7425 \begin_inset space ~
7429 \begin_inset space ~
7434 ) to start a new line in an
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7449 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_layout Standard
7454 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7455 or list of references.
7456 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7463 \begin_inset Index idx
7466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7480 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7481 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7482 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7483 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7497 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7498 The book document classes ignores the
7502 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7506 in a letter document class.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7514 environment does several things for you.
7515 First, it puts the centered label
7516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7524 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7526 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7527 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7528 the subsequent text.
7529 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7530 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7534 \begin_layout Standard
7535 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7539 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7540 The new paragraph will still be in the
7545 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7546 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7549 \begin_layout Standard
7550 \begin_inset Float figure
7555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7557 \begin_inset Graphics
7558 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7566 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7571 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7592 \begin_layout Standard
7593 We would love to demonstrate the
7597 environment, but since this document is in the
7598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7605 class, we can't do this.
7606 We inserted it therefore as figure
7607 \begin_inset space ~
7611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7613 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7618 If you have never heard of an
7619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7626 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7635 \begin_inset Index idx
7638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7647 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7654 \begin_layout Standard
7659 environment is used to list references.
7660 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7661 only use it at the end of the document.
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 When you first open a
7678 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7694 depending on the document class.
7695 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7696 Each paragraph of the
7700 environment is a bibliography entry.
7705 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7706 Each new paragraph is still in the
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7714 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7715 by using a BibTeX database.
7716 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7717 phy handling, have a look at section
7718 \begin_inset space ~
7722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7724 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7731 \begin_layout Subsection
7735 \begin_inset Index idx
7738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7739 Paragraph ! LyX code
7745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7754 \begin_layout Standard
7759 environment is another LyX extension.
7760 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7765 key as a fixed whitespace;
7769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset space ~
7786 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7791 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7792 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7795 arg "newline-insert newline"
7812 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7813 So, when you finish using the
7817 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7818 Also, you can nest the
7822 environment inside of others.
7825 \begin_layout Standard
7826 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7829 \begin_layout Itemize
7833 arg "newline-insert newline"
7836 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7841 \begin_inset space \space{}
7851 arg "newline-insert newline"
7857 \begin_layout Itemize
7861 arg "newline-insert newline"
7871 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7877 \begin_layout Itemize
7878 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7879 You must put at least one
7883 in any line you want blank.
7884 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7887 \begin_layout Itemize
7888 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7892 since that will insert
7897 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7900 arg "self-insert \""
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7918 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7922 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7926 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7927 printf("Hello World!
7932 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7936 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7940 \begin_layout Standard
7941 This is just the standard
7942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7953 \begin_layout Standard
7958 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7959 rc-files, and so on.
7960 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7961 as if you used a typewriter.
7962 \begin_inset Index idx
7965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7966 Paragraph environments|)
7971 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7974 Program Code Listings
7979 \begin_inset space ~
7987 \begin_layout Section
7988 Nesting Environments
7989 \begin_inset Index idx
7992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 Nesting ! Environments
7999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8008 \begin_layout Subsection
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8013 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8015 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8017 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8019 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8031 \begin_layout Enumerate
8035 \begin_layout Enumerate
8040 \begin_layout Enumerate
8044 \begin_layout Enumerate
8049 \begin_layout Enumerate
8053 \begin_layout Standard
8054 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8055 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8057 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8059 \begin_inset space ~
8063 \begin_inset space ~
8071 \begin_inset space ~
8075 \begin_inset space ~
8080 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8082 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8085 arg "depth-increment"
8091 arg "depth-decrement"
8105 arg "depth-increment"
8111 arg "depth-decrement"
8115 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8116 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8120 \begin_layout Standard
8121 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8122 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8123 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8124 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8127 \begin_layout Standard
8128 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8129 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8131 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8134 \begin_layout Subsection
8135 What You Can and Can't Nest
8138 \begin_layout Standard
8139 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8140 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8143 \begin_layout Standard
8144 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8145 than a simple yes or no.
8146 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 Completely unnestable
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8163 \begin_layout Standard
8164 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8165 environments have them:
8168 \begin_layout Description
8169 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8170 Can't nest into them.
8174 \begin_layout Itemize
8180 \begin_layout Itemize
8186 \begin_layout Itemize
8192 \begin_layout Itemize
8198 \begin_layout Itemize
8205 \begin_layout Description
8207 \begin_inset space ~
8210 Nestable You can nest them.
8211 You can nest other things into them.
8215 \begin_layout Itemize
8221 \begin_layout Itemize
8227 \begin_layout Itemize
8233 \begin_layout Itemize
8239 \begin_layout Itemize
8245 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8257 \begin_layout Itemize
8264 \begin_layout Description
8265 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8266 You can't nest anything into them.
8270 \begin_layout Itemize
8276 \begin_layout Itemize
8282 \begin_layout Itemize
8288 \begin_layout Itemize
8294 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 \begin_layout Itemize
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8312 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 \begin_layout Itemize
8336 \begin_layout Itemize
8342 \begin_layout Itemize
8348 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_inset space ~
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8374 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8384 \begin_inset space ~
8387 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8388 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8389 nested section headings violate this.
8397 \begin_layout Subsection
8398 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8403 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8411 \begin_layout Standard
8412 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8413 affected by nesting anyhow.
8417 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8429 \begin_layout Standard
8431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8439 Figures and tables in
8443 are not affected by this.
8448 Have a look at section
8449 \begin_inset space ~
8453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8455 reference "sec:Floats"
8459 for more information about
8466 \begin_layout Standard
8467 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8468 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8472 \begin_layout Standard
8473 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8481 of its own, it behaves just like a
8482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8489 paragraph environment.
8490 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 Here's an example with a table:
8498 \begin_layout Enumerate
8503 \begin_layout Enumerate
8504 This is (a) and it's nested.
8508 \begin_layout Standard
8509 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8517 \begin_inset Tabular
8518 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8519 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8520 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 \begin_layout Standard
8606 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8613 \begin_layout Enumerate
8615 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8619 \begin_layout Enumerate
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8624 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8627 \begin_layout Enumerate
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8633 This is (a) and it's nested.
8637 \begin_layout Standard
8638 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8644 \begin_layout Standard
8646 \begin_inset Tabular
8647 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8648 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8649 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8650 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8748 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8751 \begin_layout Enumerate
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8760 \begin_layout Standard
8761 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8763 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8766 \begin_layout Enumerate
8771 \begin_layout Enumerate
8772 This is (a) and it's nested.
8775 \begin_layout Standard
8776 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8784 \begin_inset Tabular
8785 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8786 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8873 \begin_layout Standard
8874 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8880 \begin_layout Enumerate
8882 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8893 \begin_layout Standard
8894 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8900 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8901 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8905 \begin_layout Subsection
8906 Usage and General Features
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8910 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8919 is the innermost possible depth.
8920 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8923 \begin_layout Enumerate
8924 level #1 – outermost
8928 \begin_layout Enumerate
8933 \begin_layout Enumerate
8938 \begin_layout Enumerate
8943 \begin_layout Itemize
8948 \begin_layout Itemize
8957 \begin_layout Standard
8958 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8959 both of them in the example.
8960 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8970 For example, if we tried to nest another
8975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8982 , we would get errors.
8985 \begin_layout Subsection
8987 \begin_inset Index idx
8990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9001 We have several examples of nested environments.
9002 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9007 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9010 \begin_layout Labeling
9011 \labelwidthstring MMM
9012 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9021 \begin_layout Labeling
9022 \labelwidthstring MMM
9023 #2-a This is level #2.
9024 We created it by using
9027 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9033 arg "depth-increment"
9040 \begin_layout Labeling
9041 \labelwidthstring MMM
9042 #3-a This is level #3.
9043 This time, we just enter
9050 arg "depth-increment"
9054 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9058 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9064 arg "depth-increment"
9071 \begin_layout Standard
9076 environment, nested inside of
9077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9085 So, it's at level #4.
9086 We did this by entering
9089 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9095 arg "depth-increment"
9098 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9103 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9119 \begin_layout Standard
9124 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9127 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9133 \begin_layout Labeling
9134 \labelwidthstring MMM
9135 #4-a This is level #4.
9139 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9142 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9147 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9151 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9156 keep nesting things inside
9157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9168 \begin_layout Labeling
9169 \labelwidthstring MMM
9170 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9175 \begin_layout Labeling
9176 \labelwidthstring MMM
9177 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9178 and this is level #6.
9179 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9183 \begin_layout Labeling
9184 \labelwidthstring MMM
9185 #5-b Back to level #5.
9189 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9195 arg "depth-decrement"
9202 \begin_layout Labeling
9203 \labelwidthstring MMM
9207 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9213 arg "depth-decrement"
9216 , we're back at level #4.
9220 \begin_layout Labeling
9221 \labelwidthstring MMM
9222 #3-b Back to level #3.
9223 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9227 \begin_layout Labeling
9228 \labelwidthstring MMM
9229 #2-b Back to level #2.
9234 \begin_layout Labeling
9235 \labelwidthstring MMM
9236 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9237 After this sentence, we will enter
9241 and change the paragraph environment back to
9248 \begin_layout Standard
9249 We could have also used the
9265 environment in place of the
9270 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9274 Example 2: Inheritance
9277 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9278 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9281 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9294 \begin_inset Newline newline
9297 which, we will change to the
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 environment, at level #2.
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 Notice how the nested
9318 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9322 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 We ended this example by entering
9332 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9336 and reset the nesting depth by using
9339 arg "depth-decrement"
9345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9346 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9355 \begin_inset Argument 1
9358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9359 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9367 \begin_layout Enumerate
9368 This is level #1, in an
9372 paragraph environment.
9373 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9377 \begin_layout Enumerate
9382 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9388 arg "depth-increment"
9392 Now, what happens if we nest an
9396 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9397 label be? An asterisk?
9401 \begin_layout Itemize
9411 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9412 So, its label is a bullet.
9413 (We got here by using
9416 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9422 arg "depth-increment"
9425 , then changing the environment to
9433 \begin_layout Itemize
9434 Here's level #4, produced using
9437 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9452 \begin_layout Enumerate
9453 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9455 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9460 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9464 , because we are in the
9472 environment (that is, it is an
9487 \begin_layout Enumerate
9492 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9493 type of numbering does LyX use?
9496 \begin_layout Enumerate
9497 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9500 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9503 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9506 \begin_layout Enumerate
9510 arg "depth-decrement"
9513 to decrease the depth after the next
9516 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9523 \begin_layout Enumerate
9525 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9529 \begin_layout Enumerate
9531 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9532 numeral as the label.Why?
9535 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9545 Notice, however, that LyX
9549 reset the counter for the label.
9553 \begin_layout Enumerate
9557 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9563 arg "depth-decrement"
9566 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9567 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9568 into the twofold-nested
9576 \begin_layout Enumerate
9577 The same thing happens if we do another
9580 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9586 arg "depth-decrement"
9589 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9592 \begin_layout Standard
9593 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9598 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9612 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9618 The same rule applies for the
9622 environment, as well.
9625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9626 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9629 \begin_layout Enumerate
9630 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9631 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9632 the same detail with how we did it.
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9649 arg "depth-increment"
9656 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9657 the example in parentheses someplace.
9658 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9659 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9660 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9669 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9674 Now we will add verse.
9675 \begin_inset Newline newline
9678 It will get much worse.
9679 \begin_inset Newline newline
9689 arg "depth-increment"
9700 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9701 \begin_inset Newline newline
9704 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9705 \begin_inset Newline newline
9711 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9725 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9731 \begin_layout Standard
9733 \begin_inset Tabular
9734 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9735 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9736 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9826 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9842 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9852 arg "depth-decrement"
9859 \begin_layout Enumerate
9864 : level #1) This is another item.
9865 Note that selecting a
9869 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9870 3 times to put the table inside the
9878 \begin_layout Quotation
9879 We're now ending the
9883 list and changing to
9888 We're still at level #1.
9889 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9890 The next set of paragraphs is a
9891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9898 We will nest both the
9905 \begin_inset space ~
9910 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9914 for the letter body.
9918 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9921 to preserve the depth.
9922 Remember that you need to use
9925 arg "newline-insert newline"
9928 to create multiple lines inside the
9935 \begin_inset space ~
9945 \begin_layout Right Address
9947 \begin_inset Newline newline
9950 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9951 \begin_inset Newline newline
9957 \begin_layout Address
9959 \begin_inset space ~
9965 \begin_layout Quotation
9966 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9970 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9971 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9972 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9973 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9974 as soon as possible.
9975 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9978 \begin_layout Quotation
9979 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9980 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9981 with your order, along with payment.
9984 \begin_layout Quotation
9985 We thank you again for your patience.
9988 \begin_layout Address
9990 \begin_inset Newline newline
9997 \begin_layout Quotation
9998 That ends that example!
10001 \begin_layout Standard
10002 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10003 just a few keystrokes.
10004 We could have easily nested an
10025 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10028 \begin_layout Section
10029 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10030 \begin_inset Index idx
10033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10042 \begin_layout Standard
10043 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10044 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10045 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10046 be broken at the end of a line.
10047 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10051 \begin_layout Subsection
10053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10055 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10060 \begin_inset Index idx
10063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10073 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10074 line at that point.
10075 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10078 \begin_layout Quote
10079 Further documentation is given in section
10080 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10086 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10095 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10110 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10119 A protected space is set with
10121 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10122 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10132 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10138 \begin_layout Subsection
10140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10142 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10147 \begin_inset Index idx
10150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10151 Spacing ! Horizontal
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10160 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10162 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10163 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10167 The length units are listed in Appendix
10168 \begin_inset space ~
10172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10174 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10185 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10190 \begin_inset Index idx
10193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 Spaces ! Inter-word
10202 \begin_layout Standard
10203 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10204 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10205 at the ends of sentences.
10206 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10207 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10208 followed by a period; see section
10209 \begin_inset space ~
10213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10215 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10220 To insert a normal space, select
10222 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10223 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10225 \begin_inset space ~
10233 arg "space-insert normal"
10239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10243 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10248 \begin_inset Index idx
10251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10260 \begin_layout Standard
10262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10269 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10278 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10279 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10280 inside abbreviations:
10283 \begin_layout Quote
10285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10289 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10292 \begin_layout Standard
10293 or between values and units.
10294 Compare for example this:
10295 \begin_inset Newline newline
10299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10303 \begin_inset Newline newline
10306 10 kg (normal space
10309 \begin_layout Standard
10310 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10312 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10313 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10315 \begin_inset space ~
10323 arg "space-insert thin"
10329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10333 \begin_layout Standard
10334 You can also insert the following space types:
10337 \begin_layout Description
10339 \begin_inset space ~
10343 \begin_inset space ~
10346 space A line with a
10347 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10351 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10355 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10358 negative thin space between the arrows.
10361 \begin_layout Description
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10367 \begin_inset space ~
10370 space A line with a
10371 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10375 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10379 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10382 negative medium space between the arrows.
10385 \begin_layout Description
10387 \begin_inset space ~
10391 \begin_inset space ~
10394 space A line with a
10395 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10399 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10403 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10406 negative thick space between the arrows.
10409 \begin_layout Description
10411 \begin_inset space ~
10415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10419 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10423 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10427 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10431 \begin_inset space ~
10435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10438 em) space between the arrows.
10441 \begin_layout Description
10443 \begin_inset space ~
10447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10451 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10455 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10459 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10463 \begin_inset space ~
10467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10470 em) space between the arrows.
10473 \begin_layout Description
10475 \begin_inset space ~
10479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10483 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10487 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10491 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10495 \begin_inset space ~
10499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10502 em) space between the arrows.
10505 \begin_layout Description
10507 \begin_inset space ~
10511 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10515 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10520 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10527 cm space between the arrows.
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10532 \begin_inset space ~
10536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10538 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10542 lists the different space sizes.
10545 \begin_layout Standard
10546 \begin_inset Float table
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10552 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10557 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10561 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10571 \begin_inset Tabular
10572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10573 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10575 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10691 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10854 \begin_inset Index idx
10857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10866 \begin_layout Standard
10867 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10868 in a uniform fashion.
10869 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10870 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10871 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10872 equally between themselves.
10875 \begin_layout Standard
10876 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10879 \begin_layout Quote
10881 This is on the left side
10882 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10885 This is on the right
10888 \begin_layout Quote
10891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10895 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10901 \begin_layout Quote
10904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10908 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10912 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10918 \begin_layout Standard
10919 That was an example in the
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10929 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10936 is one in a standard paragraph.
10937 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10941 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10944 \begin_layout Standard
10945 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10948 \begin_inset space ~
10953 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10958 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10962 \begin_inset space ~
10968 \begin_layout Standard
10970 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10974 \begin_inset space ~
10980 \begin_layout Standard
10982 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_layout Standard
10994 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10998 \begin_inset space ~
11004 \begin_layout Standard
11006 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11010 \begin_inset space ~
11016 \begin_layout Standard
11018 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11022 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_layout Standard
11029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11037 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11041 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11042 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11043 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11047 option in the space dialog.
11055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11059 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11064 \begin_inset Index idx
11067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11077 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11078 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11081 \begin_layout Standard
11082 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11085 What is correct English?:
11086 \begin_inset Newline newline
11090 \begin_inset Newline newline
11094 \begin_inset space ~
11097 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11098 \begin_inset Newline newline
11102 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11113 \begin_inset Newline newline
11117 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11128 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11134 \begin_layout Standard
11136 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11141 \begin_inset space ~
11145 \begin_inset space ~
11149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11153 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11155 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11156 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11160 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11166 \begin_inset space ~
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11177 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11186 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11187 That is why it is named
11188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11196 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11197 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11201 \begin_layout Subsection
11203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11205 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11210 \begin_inset Index idx
11213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11222 \begin_layout Standard
11223 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11225 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11226 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11228 \begin_inset space ~
11234 There you find the following sizes:
11237 \begin_layout Standard
11250 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11255 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11257 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11258 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11260 \begin_inset space ~
11266 \begin_inset Index idx
11269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11270 Document ! Settings
11275 for the paragraph separation.
11276 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11287 \begin_layout Standard
11293 \begin_inset Index idx
11296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11303 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11308 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11309 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11318 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11327 s are described in section
11328 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11334 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11343 If there are several
11347 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11348 You can therefore use
11352 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11360 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11367 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11374 \begin_layout Standard
11375 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11386 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11398 \begin_layout Subsection
11399 Paragraph Alignment
11400 \begin_inset Index idx
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11404 Paragraph ! Alignment
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11415 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11418 dialog (toolbar button
11421 arg "layout-paragraph"
11425 There are five possibilities:
11428 \begin_layout Itemize
11436 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11442 \begin_layout Itemize
11450 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11456 \begin_layout Itemize
11464 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11470 \begin_layout Itemize
11478 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11484 \begin_layout Itemize
11492 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11499 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11500 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11501 the left and right margins.
11502 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11507 This paragraph is right aligned,
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 this one is centered,
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 this one is left aligned.
11520 \begin_layout Subsection
11522 \begin_inset Index idx
11525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11526 Page breaks ! Forced
11532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11534 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11541 \begin_layout Standard
11542 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11543 can force a page break where you want one.
11544 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11545 Only if you use a lot of
11549 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11552 \begin_layout Standard
11553 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11554 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11558 have to change the page breaking.
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11562 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11564 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11566 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11567 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11575 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11577 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11578 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11580 \begin_inset space ~
11585 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11587 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11588 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11592 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11593 at the top of a page.
11594 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11595 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11596 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11597 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11601 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11605 to learn more about
11612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11616 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11621 \begin_inset Index idx
11624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11625 Page breaks ! Clear
11633 \begin_layout Standard
11634 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11635 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11636 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11637 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11638 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11641 \begin_layout Standard
11642 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11644 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11645 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11647 \begin_inset space ~
11653 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11655 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11656 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11658 \begin_inset space ~
11662 \begin_inset space ~
11667 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11668 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11671 \begin_layout Subsection
11673 \begin_inset Index idx
11676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11685 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11692 \begin_layout Standard
11693 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11695 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11697 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11700 \begin_inset space ~
11704 \begin_inset space ~
11712 arg "newline-insert newline"
11716 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11718 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11719 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11721 \begin_inset space ~
11725 \begin_inset space ~
11733 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11736 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11738 This is useful to avoid
11739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11746 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11749 \begin_layout Standard
11750 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11751 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11752 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11753 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11754 \begin_inset space ~
11758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11760 reference "sec:Quote"
11765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11767 reference "sec:Verse"
11772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11774 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11781 \begin_layout Subsection
11783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11785 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11790 \begin_inset Index idx
11793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11802 \begin_layout Standard
11804 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11815 \begin_layout Standard
11819 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11820 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11822 \begin_inset space ~
11827 you can insert horizontal lines.
11828 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11829 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11830 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11833 \begin_layout Standard
11835 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11846 \begin_layout Section
11847 Characters and Symbols
11850 \begin_layout Standard
11851 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11852 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11853 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11861 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11865 for information on how this is done.
11868 \begin_layout Standard
11869 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11874 dialog via the menu
11876 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11877 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11892 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11893 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11894 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11902 \begin_layout Section
11903 Fonts and Text Styles
11904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11906 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11913 \begin_layout Subsection
11915 \begin_inset Index idx
11918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11927 \begin_layout Standard
11928 There are two types of fonts:
11931 \begin_layout Description
11933 \begin_inset space ~
11937 \begin_inset Index idx
11940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11946 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11951 characters) in the font.
11952 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11953 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11954 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11955 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11956 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11957 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11958 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11959 \begin_inset Newline newline
11962 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11963 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11964 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11965 sizes than at small ones.
11966 \begin_inset Newline newline
11980 \begin_inset space ~
11988 \begin_layout Description
11990 \begin_inset space ~
11994 \begin_inset Index idx
11997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12003 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12004 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12005 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12006 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12007 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12008 image manipulation program.
12009 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12010 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12011 \begin_inset space ~
12014 pixels high up to 34
12015 \begin_inset space ~
12018 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12019 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12020 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12022 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12023 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12024 \begin_inset Newline newline
12027 Bitmap fonts are named
12030 \begin_inset space ~
12035 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12038 \begin_layout Standard
12039 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12040 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12041 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12042 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12043 use scalable fonts.
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12047 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12051 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12052 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12053 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12054 font to emphasize text, you use an
12055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12063 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12064 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12072 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12079 \begin_layout Standard
12080 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12081 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12082 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12084 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12085 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12086 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12087 to a word processor.
12088 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12089 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12090 across different machines.
12091 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12092 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12094 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12096 \begin_inset space ~
12100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12102 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12107 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12108 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12114 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12116 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12117 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12118 that is installed on your system.
12119 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12131 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12132 es; so you might have to experiment.
12140 \begin_layout Standard
12141 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12149 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12150 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12158 \begin_layout Subsection
12159 Document Font and Font size
12160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12162 name "sub:Document-Font"
12167 \begin_inset Index idx
12170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 \begin_inset Index idx
12180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12189 \begin_layout Standard
12190 You can set the document fonts in the
12192 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset Index idx
12199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12200 Document ! Settings
12210 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12211 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12223 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12224 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12225 with the roman font.
12228 \begin_layout Standard
12235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12244 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12245 This requires that you use
12251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12290 as the output format, i.
12291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12295 \begin_inset space \space{}
12298 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12299 \begin_inset space ~
12303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12305 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12310 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12311 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12313 \begin_inset space ~
12316 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12317 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12318 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12320 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12324 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12329 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12334 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12335 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12342 \begin_inset space ~
12348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12361 European Computer Modern
12364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12371 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12374 \begin_layout Standard
12383 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12384 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12389 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12392 \begin_inset space ~
12397 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12403 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12404 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12407 \begin_layout Itemize
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12416 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12429 \begin_inset space ~
12434 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12438 as the default font.
12439 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12440 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12457 One difference is improved kerning.
12465 \begin_layout Itemize
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12473 \begin_inset space ~
12478 fonts in (the rare) case that
12481 \begin_inset space ~
12486 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12501 Virtual means that it
12502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12513 -glyphs from other fonts.
12514 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12536 Loading the LaTeX-package
12541 \begin_inset Index idx
12544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12545 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12550 with the document preamble line
12551 \begin_inset Newline newline
12558 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12559 \begin_inset Newline newline
12564 will fix the guillemet problem.
12569 and that accented characters are not
12573 glyph, but built of
12577 characters, the accent and the letter.
12578 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12584 If you search for example for the French word
12585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12592 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12601 and not for the glyph
12602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12606 \begin_inset space ~
12610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12616 \begin_layout Itemize
12617 If you do not like the look of
12625 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_inset space ~
12646 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12647 \begin_inset space ~
12650 serif and typewriter fonts,
12654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12655 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12662 \begin_inset space ~
12671 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12676 \begin_inset space \space{}
12684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12688 \begin_inset space \space{}
12694 \begin_inset space ~
12702 \begin_inset space ~
12712 but you can also select your own.
12713 \begin_inset Newline newline
12716 The differences between roman,
12719 \begin_inset space ~
12728 fonts are explained in section
12729 \begin_inset space ~
12733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12735 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12740 \begin_inset Newline newline
12746 \begin_inset space ~
12751 was originally designed for newspapers.
12752 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12753 into the small newspaper columns.
12757 \begin_inset space ~
12762 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12765 \begin_layout Standard
12766 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12779 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12784 depends on the class you are using.
12785 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12789 Note that the font size is the
12794 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12795 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12796 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12805 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12819 \begin_layout Standard
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12828 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12833 serif or typewriter.
12838 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12848 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12851 \begin_layout Standard
12860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12869 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12875 \begin_inset Index idx
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12885 \begin_inset space ~
12889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12891 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12896 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12897 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12904 \begin_layout Standard
12905 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12907 Use Old Style Figures
12911 Use True Small Caps
12914 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12917 Use Old Style Figures
12919 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12921 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12929 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12933 Use True Small Caps
12935 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12936 of scaled capitals.
12937 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12938 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12941 \begin_layout Standard
12946 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12947 a font to display the script characters.
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12952 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12957 \begin_inset Index idx
12960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12961 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12966 So this has no effect for the document language
12980 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12984 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12992 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12996 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12997 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12998 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13000 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13003 dialog, see section
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13010 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13022 \begin_layout Subsection
13023 Using Different Character Styles
13024 \begin_inset Index idx
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13046 \begin_layout Standard
13047 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13048 certain paragraph environments.
13049 LyX supports two character styles,
13058 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13062 \begin_layout Standard
13067 style, do one of the following:
13070 \begin_layout Itemize
13071 click on the toolbar button
13080 \begin_layout Itemize
13081 use the key binding
13090 \begin_layout Standard
13091 These commands are all toggles.
13096 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13100 One typically uses the
13104 style for proper names.
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13113 is the original author of LyX.
13114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 \begin_layout Standard
13121 A more widely used character style is the
13126 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 clicking on the toolbar button
13143 \begin_layout Itemize
13144 using the keybindings
13153 \begin_layout Standard
13158 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13159 es use a different font.
13162 \begin_layout Standard
13163 We've been using the
13167 style all over the place in this document.
13168 Here's one more example:
13171 \begin_layout Quotation
13174 Do not overuse character styles!
13177 \begin_layout Standard
13178 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13179 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13180 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13181 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13185 \begin_layout Standard
13186 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13194 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13199 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13205 arg "dialog-show character"
13211 \begin_layout Subsection
13212 Fine-Tuning with the
13217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13219 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13224 \begin_inset Index idx
13227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13237 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13238 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13239 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13240 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13241 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13242 from ordinary dialog.
13245 \begin_layout Standard
13246 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13247 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13248 \begin_inset Newline newline
13251 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13252 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13255 \begin_layout Standard
13256 To use custom character styles, open the
13258 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13260 \begin_inset space ~
13263 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13266 dialog or press the toolbar button
13269 arg "dialog-show character"
13273 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13274 font property that you can choose.
13275 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13283 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13288 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13289 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13290 environments all at once.
13293 \begin_layout Standard
13294 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13297 \begin_inset space ~
13309 \begin_layout Labeling
13310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13324 The possible options are:
13328 \begin_layout Labeling
13329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13334 This is the Roman font family.
13335 Normally a serif font.
13336 It's also the default family.
13346 \begin_layout Labeling
13347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13358 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13370 \begin_layout Labeling
13371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13378 This is the Typewriter font family.
13384 arg "font-typewriter"
13393 \begin_layout Labeling
13394 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 This corresponds to the print weight.
13404 \begin_layout Labeling
13405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13410 This is the Medium font series.
13411 It's also the default series.
13414 \begin_layout Labeling
13415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13422 This is the Bold font series.
13435 \begin_layout Labeling
13436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13441 As the name implies.
13446 \begin_layout Labeling
13447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13452 This is the Upright font shape.
13453 It's also the default shape.
13456 \begin_layout Labeling
13457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13471 s the Italic font shape
13477 \begin_layout Labeling
13478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13485 This is the Slanted font shape
13487 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13490 \begin_layout Labeling
13491 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13502 This is the Small caps font shape
13509 \begin_layout Labeling
13510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13515 Alters the text color.
13516 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13525 , which means that the document default color set in
13527 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13528 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13534 \begin_inset space ~
13539 is used, you can choose between
13572 \begin_inset Index idx
13575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13584 \begin_layout Labeling
13585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13590 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13591 the language of the document.
13592 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13594 \begin_inset Newline newline
13597 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13598 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13599 When using the spell checking (see section
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13606 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13610 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13613 \begin_layout Labeling
13614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13619 Alters the size of the font.
13620 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13621 proportional to the document font size.
13622 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13623 what you want to do.
13628 \begin_layout Labeling
13629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13650 arg "font-size tiny"
13656 \begin_layout Labeling
13657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13678 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13684 \begin_layout Labeling
13685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13706 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13712 \begin_layout Labeling
13713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13734 arg "font-size small"
13740 \begin_layout Labeling
13741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 It's also the default size.
13759 arg "font-size normal"
13765 \begin_layout Labeling
13766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13787 arg "font-size large"
13793 \begin_layout Labeling
13794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13815 arg "font-size larger"
13821 \begin_layout Labeling
13822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13843 arg "font-size largest"
13849 \begin_layout Labeling
13850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13871 arg "font-size huge"
13877 \begin_layout Labeling
13878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13899 arg "font-size giant"
13905 \begin_layout Labeling
13906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13911 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13931 arg "font-size increase"
13937 \begin_layout Labeling
13938 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13943 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13963 arg "font-size decrease"
13970 \begin_layout Standard
13975 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13976 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13977 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13978 — use those instead.
13979 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13982 \begin_layout Labeling
13983 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is text with emphasize on
14004 This might seem like the same as
14008 , but it is actually a bit different.
14014 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14016 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14019 \begin_layout Labeling
14020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14027 This is text with Underbar on.
14033 arg "font-underline"
14039 \begin_inset Newline newline
14044 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14045 when you could not change fonts.
14046 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14047 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14051 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14054 \begin_layout Labeling
14055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 \begin_inset space ~
14066 This is text with Double underbar on.
14072 arg "font-underunderline"
14076 \begin_inset Newline newline
14079 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14080 about double underbar.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14088 \begin_inset space ~
14095 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14101 arg "font-underwave"
14105 \begin_inset Newline newline
14108 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14109 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14112 \begin_layout Labeling
14113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14120 This is text with Strikeout on.
14126 arg "font-strikeout"
14130 \begin_inset Newline newline
14133 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14134 changed in the meantime.
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14145 This is text with Noun on.
14152 , this is a logical attribute.
14153 Normally it's equivalent to
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14165 \begin_layout Standard
14166 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14167 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14169 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14171 \begin_inset space ~
14174 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14180 arg "dialog-show character"
14183 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14184 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14187 arg "textstyle-apply"
14191 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14195 \begin_layout Standard
14196 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14203 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14204 (suppose you just set the shape to
14205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14223 \begin_inset space ~
14235 \begin_layout Standard
14236 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14244 \begin_inset space ~
14256 \begin_layout Itemize
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14287 \begin_inset Newline newline
14291 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14305 \begin_inset Note Note
14308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14309 For more on phantoms see section
14310 \begin_inset space ~
14314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14316 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14326 \begin_inset Newline newline
14332 \begin_layout Itemize
14337 fonts use characters with serifs.
14338 These are the small
14339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14346 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14347 The following example shows the difference:
14348 \begin_inset Newline newline
14352 \begin_inset Newline newline
14357 text without serifs
14360 \begin_inset Newline newline
14363 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14364 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14371 \begin_layout Itemize
14376 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14377 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14378 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14381 \begin_layout Standard
14382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14389 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14390 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14398 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14399 the property to be removed.
14400 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14401 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14402 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14420 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14421 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14438 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14449 If you, for example, set
14450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 \begin_inset space ~
14473 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14485 \begin_layout Standard
14486 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14487 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14490 \begin_layout Section
14491 Printing and Previewing
14494 \begin_layout Subsection
14498 \begin_layout Standard
14499 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14500 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14501 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14502 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14503 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14505 Additional Features
14510 \begin_layout Standard
14511 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14512 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14513 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14514 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14515 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14516 This happens in two stages:
14519 \begin_layout Enumerate
14520 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14521 generating a file with the extension,
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14536 \begin_layout Enumerate
14537 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14541 file to produce printable output.
14544 \begin_layout Subsection
14545 Output file formats
14546 \begin_inset Index idx
14549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14558 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14566 Simple text (ASCII)
14567 \begin_inset Index idx
14570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14571 File formats ! ASCII
14579 \begin_layout Standard
14580 This file type has the extension
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14593 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14597 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14605 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14607 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14608 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14610 \begin_inset space ~
14616 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14617 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14618 \begin_inset space ~
14622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14624 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14629 If your document includes such material, use
14631 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14632 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14634 \begin_inset space ~
14638 \begin_inset space ~
14642 \begin_inset space ~
14650 \begin_inset space ~
14654 \begin_inset space ~
14660 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14661 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14666 \begin_inset Index idx
14669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14670 File formats ! LaTeX
14678 \begin_layout Standard
14679 This file type has the extension
14680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14691 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14693 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14694 it manually with console commands.
14695 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14696 you view or export your document.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14700 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14702 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14703 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14718 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14719 \begin_inset space ~
14723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14725 reference "sub:Export"
14732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14734 \begin_inset Index idx
14737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14746 \begin_layout Standard
14747 This file type has the extension
14748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14768 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14769 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14770 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14774 \begin_layout Standard
14775 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14776 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14777 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14778 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14779 when you view the DVI.
14780 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14783 \begin_layout Standard
14784 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14786 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14787 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14792 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14793 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14795 \begin_inset space ~
14802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14812 The latter option uses the program
14821 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14822 font access (see section
14823 \begin_inset space ~
14827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14829 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14834 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14835 standard TeX processor.
14838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14840 \begin_inset Index idx
14843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14844 File formats ! PostScript
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 This file type has the extension
14854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14866 PostScript was developed by the company
14870 as a printer language.
14871 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14873 PostScript can be seen as a
14874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14877 programming language
14878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14881 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14886 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14892 \begin_inset Index idx
14895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14896 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14906 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14910 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 Encapsulated PostScript
14915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14918 (EPS, file extension
14919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14931 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14932 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14933 If, for example, you have 50
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14937 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14941 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14942 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14943 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14944 EPS to avoid this problem.
14947 \begin_layout Standard
14948 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14950 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14951 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14959 \begin_inset Index idx
14962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14969 \begin_inset Index idx
14972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14981 \begin_layout Standard
14982 This file type has the extension
14983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14999 Portable Document Format
15000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15007 was derived from PostScript.
15008 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15018 looks exactly the same.
15021 \begin_layout Standard
15022 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15026 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15030 (JPG, file extension
15031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15058 Portable Network Graphics
15059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15062 (PNG, file extension
15063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15075 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15076 background to one of these formats.
15077 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15078 will slow down your workflow.
15079 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15083 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15085 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15091 \begin_layout Description
15093 \begin_inset space ~
15096 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15100 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15103 \begin_layout Description
15105 \begin_inset space ~
15112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15119 X) This uses the program
15123 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15128 is a new engine, derived from
15132 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15133 access (see section
15134 \begin_inset space ~
15138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15140 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15145 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15146 standard TeX processor.
15149 \begin_layout Description
15151 \begin_inset space ~
15158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15165 X) This uses the program
15169 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15174 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15175 font access (see section
15176 \begin_inset space ~
15180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15182 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15187 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15188 vertically written Japanese.
15191 \begin_layout Description
15193 \begin_inset space ~
15196 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15200 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15204 \begin_layout Description
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15209 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15213 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15214 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15218 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15219 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15222 \begin_layout Standard
15226 \begin_inset space ~
15235 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15236 works without problems.
15237 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15238 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15242 \begin_inset space ~
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15261 \begin_inset space ~
15268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15277 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15287 \begin_inset Index idx
15290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 FileFormats ! XHTML
15297 \begin_inset Index idx
15300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15309 \begin_layout Standard
15310 This file type has the extension
15311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15323 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15324 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15325 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15326 suitable for the purpose.
15327 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15329 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15330 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15333 between different formats, which are described in section
15335 Math Output in XHTML
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15349 XHTML output remains
15350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15360 LyX and the World Wide Web
15364 Additional Features
15366 manual, for more information.
15369 \begin_layout Standard
15370 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15372 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15373 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15379 \begin_layout Subsection
15381 \begin_inset Index idx
15384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15393 \begin_layout Standard
15394 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15395 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15404 or use the toolbar button
15411 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15412 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15419 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15423 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15431 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15436 Further output formats can be selected via
15438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15439 View (Other Formats)
15441 or the toolbar button
15442 \begin_inset Graphics
15443 filename ../images/view-others.png
15445 groupId toolbarbuttons
15452 \begin_layout Standard
15453 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15454 viewer window using the menu
15456 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15461 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15462 Update (Other Formats)
15467 \begin_layout Standard
15468 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15470 To have a real output, export your document.
15473 \begin_layout Subsection
15474 Printing the File from within LyX
15475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15477 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15484 \begin_layout Standard
15485 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15486 it directly from within LyX.
15487 To print a file, select the menu
15489 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15495 arg "dialog-show print"
15498 ) or click on the toolbar button
15501 arg "dialog-show print"
15505 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15506 This file is then processed by the program
15510 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15515 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15518 \begin_layout Standard
15519 You can set the following print parameters in the
15522 \begin_inset space ~
15530 \begin_layout Labeling
15531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15536 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15541 Note that this printer name is for the program
15550 has to be configured for this printer name.
15551 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15552 \begin_inset space ~
15556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15558 reference "sub:Printer"
15567 The printer should understand PostScript.
15570 \begin_layout Labeling
15571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15576 The name of a file to print to.
15577 The output will be a PostScript file.
15578 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15582 \begin_layout Standard
15583 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15584 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15585 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15586 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15587 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15588 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15589 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15592 \begin_layout Section
15593 A few Words about Typography
15594 \begin_inset Index idx
15597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15606 \begin_layout Subsection
15607 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15608 \begin_inset Index idx
15611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15618 \begin_inset Index idx
15621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15630 \begin_layout Standard
15632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15643 character comes in four lengths: the
15655 , and the minus sign:
15656 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15662 \begin_layout Standard
15663 \begin_inset Tabular
15664 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15665 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15666 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15667 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15668 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15669 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15698 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15765 \begin_inset space ~
15768 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15775 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15800 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15805 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15826 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15860 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15866 \begin_layout Standard
15867 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15879 character multiple times in a row.
15880 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15881 the final output, but not in LyX.
15883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15913 \begin_layout Standard
15914 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15915 math mode and has a length of its own.
15916 Here are some examples:
15919 \begin_layout Enumerate
15920 line- and page-breaks
15921 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15931 \begin_layout Enumerate
15933 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15943 \begin_layout Enumerate
15944 Oh — there's a dash.
15945 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15955 \begin_layout Enumerate
15956 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15970 \begin_layout Subsection
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15984 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15993 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15998 \begin_inset Index idx
16001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16002 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16007 following the rules of the document language.
16010 \begin_layout Standard
16011 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16016 font and with unusual constructs, like
16017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16025 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16027 This is done with the menu
16029 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16030 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16032 \begin_inset space ~
16038 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16039 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16042 \begin_layout Standard
16043 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16044 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16054 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16062 as a hyphenation possibility.
16063 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16064 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16065 as described in section
16066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16069 Prevent Hyphenation
16070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16076 \begin_inset space ~
16084 \begin_layout Subsection
16086 \begin_inset Index idx
16089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16099 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16102 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16109 \begin_layout Standard
16110 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16111 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16112 LaTeX then adds the
16113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16116 appropriate amount of space.
16117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16120 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16122 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16123 gets after another word.
16126 \begin_layout Standard
16127 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16128 not work in all cases.
16130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16141 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16142 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16146 Here are some examples of
16150 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16153 \begin_layout Itemize
16158 \begin_layout Itemize
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16167 \begin_layout Itemize
16169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16173 this is too much space!
16176 \begin_layout Itemize
16181 \begin_layout Standard
16182 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16185 \begin_layout Standard
16186 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16189 \begin_layout Enumerate
16193 \begin_inset space ~
16198 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16199 \begin_inset space ~
16203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16205 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16210 \begin_inset Index idx
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 Spaces ! inter-word
16222 \begin_layout Enumerate
16226 \begin_inset space ~
16231 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16232 \begin_inset space ~
16236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16238 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16243 \begin_inset Index idx
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16255 \begin_layout Enumerate
16259 \begin_inset space ~
16263 \begin_inset space ~
16267 \begin_inset space ~
16274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16276 \begin_inset space ~
16281 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16282 This function is also bound to
16285 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16291 \begin_layout Standard
16292 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16295 \begin_layout Itemize
16297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16301 \begin_inset space \space{}
16304 this is too much space!
16307 \begin_layout Itemize
16308 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16312 \begin_layout Standard
16313 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16314 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16315 will take care of this.
16318 \begin_layout Standard
16319 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16323 \begin_inset space ~
16328 feature described in the section
16334 Additional Features
16339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16341 \begin_inset Index idx
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16345 Typography ! Quotes
16351 \begin_inset Index idx
16354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 \begin_layout Standard
16386 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16387 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16388 and use a closing quote at the end.
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16398 The keyboard character,
16402 , generates this automatically.
16405 \begin_layout Standard
16406 You can specify what character the
16410 key produces using the submenu
16416 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16420 \begin_inset Index idx
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 Document ! Settings
16434 There are six choices:
16437 \begin_layout Labeling
16438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16461 \begin_layout Labeling
16462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16465 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16469 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16475 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16479 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16485 \begin_layout Labeling
16486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16489 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16493 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16499 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16503 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16509 \begin_layout Labeling
16510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16513 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16517 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16523 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16527 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16533 \begin_layout Labeling
16534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16537 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16541 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16547 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16551 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16557 \begin_layout Labeling
16558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16561 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16565 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16571 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16575 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16581 \begin_layout Standard
16582 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16585 arg "quote-insert single"
16591 \begin_layout Subsection
16593 \begin_inset Index idx
16596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16597 Typography ! Ligatures
16603 \begin_inset Index idx
16606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16637 name "sub:Ligatures"
16644 \begin_layout Standard
16645 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16646 print them as single characters.
16647 These groups are known as
16652 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16654 Here are the standard ligatures:
16657 \begin_layout Itemize
16661 \begin_layout Itemize
16665 \begin_layout Itemize
16669 \begin_layout Itemize
16673 \begin_layout Itemize
16677 \begin_layout Standard
16678 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16681 \begin_layout Standard
16682 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16683 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16691 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16707 To break a ligature, use
16709 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16710 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16730 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16747 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16755 \begin_layout Subsection
16757 \begin_inset Index idx
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16769 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16776 \begin_layout Standard
16777 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16778 characters in different sizes and positions.
16779 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16780 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16800 \begin_inset Note Note
16803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16804 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
16805 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16810 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16811 following proper names:
16814 \begin_layout Description
16815 LyX The name of the game, write
16816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16837 \begin_layout Description
16838 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16860 \begin_layout Description
16861 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16883 \begin_layout Description
16884 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16906 \begin_layout Standard
16907 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16920 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16921 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16922 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16925 : The actual version is
16926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16933 , the previous one was
16934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16945 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16946 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16947 In LyX this will look like
16948 \begin_inset Graphics
16949 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16955 \begin_inset Newline newline
16958 For more about TeX Code, see section
16959 \begin_inset space ~
16963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16965 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16972 \begin_layout Subsection
16974 \begin_inset Index idx
16977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16986 \begin_layout Standard
16987 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16988 space between two words.
16989 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16999 for units use the menu
17001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17002 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17004 \begin_inset space ~
17012 arg "space-insert thin"
17018 \begin_layout Standard
17019 Here is an example to show the differences:
17022 \begin_layout Standard
17023 \begin_inset Tabular
17024 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17025 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17026 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17027 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17034 \begin_inset space ~
17038 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17050 space between number and unit
17057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17066 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17078 half space between number and unit
17091 \begin_layout Subsection
17093 \begin_inset Index idx
17096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17097 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17105 \begin_layout Standard
17106 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17108 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17109 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17110 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17111 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17112 These bits of text became known as
17123 \begin_layout Standard
17124 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17125 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17126 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17127 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17128 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17129 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17130 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17131 \begin_inset Newline newline
17139 \begin_inset Newline newline
17147 \begin_inset Newline newline
17150 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17151 Some LaTeX books (such as
17152 \begin_inset space ~
17156 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17158 key "latexcompanion"
17163 \begin_inset space ~
17167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17173 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17177 \begin_layout Chapter
17178 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17181 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17188 \begin_layout Standard
17189 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17192 \begin_inset space ~
17198 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17201 \begin_layout Section
17203 \begin_inset Index idx
17206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17222 \begin_layout Standard
17223 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17226 \begin_layout Description
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17231 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17232 \begin_inset Newline newline
17236 \begin_inset Note Note
17239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17240 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17248 \begin_layout Description
17249 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17250 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17252 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17253 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17272 \begin_inset Newline newline
17276 \begin_inset Note Comment
17279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17280 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17288 \begin_layout Description
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17293 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17294 set in the document settings under
17296 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17298 \begin_inset space ~
17304 \begin_inset Newline newline
17308 \begin_inset Newline newline
17312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17321 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17322 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17327 of a comment that appears in the output.
17333 \begin_inset Newline newline
17337 \begin_inset Newline newline
17340 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17343 \begin_layout Standard
17344 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17352 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17356 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17359 \begin_layout Section
17361 \begin_inset Index idx
17364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17373 name "sec:Footnotes"
17380 \begin_layout Standard
17381 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17387 or the toolbar button
17390 arg "footnote-insert"
17402 \begin_inset Graphics
17403 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17412 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17441 label, the box will
17445 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17446 Clicking on the box label again will close
17459 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17460 and click on the footnote
17475 \begin_layout Standard
17476 Here is an example footnote:
17484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17485 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17493 \begin_layout Standard
17494 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17495 position where the footnote box is placed.
17496 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17497 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17498 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17499 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17504 ey are described in the
17507 \begin_inset space ~
17515 \begin_layout Section
17517 \begin_inset Index idx
17520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17529 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17536 \begin_layout Standard
17537 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17538 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17540 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17542 \begin_inset space ~
17547 or the toolbar button
17550 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17576 appearing within your text.
17577 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17586 \begin_layout Standard
17587 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17591 \begin_inset Marginal
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17596 This is a marginal note.
17604 \begin_layout Standard
17605 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17606 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17607 pages, right on odd pages.
17610 \begin_layout Standard
17611 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17614 \begin_inset space ~
17622 \begin_inset space ~
17630 \begin_layout Section
17631 Graphics and Images
17632 \begin_inset Index idx
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17642 \begin_inset Index idx
17645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17654 name "sec:Graphics"
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17662 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17663 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17666 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17671 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17675 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17678 \begin_layout Standard
17679 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17684 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17685 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17687 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17688 \begin_inset space ~
17692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17694 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17701 \begin_layout Standard
17706 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17707 of the image in the output.
17708 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset space ~
17725 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_inset space ~
17733 \begin_inset space ~
17738 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17739 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17747 \begin_layout Standard
17754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17782 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17783 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17787 \begin_inset space ~
17792 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17793 with the image size is printed.
17797 \begin_inset space ~
17801 \begin_inset space ~
17805 \begin_inset space ~
17810 is explained in the
17813 \begin_inset space ~
17825 \begin_layout Standard
17826 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17827 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17829 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17832 \begin_layout Standard
17834 \begin_inset Graphics
17835 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17843 \begin_layout Standard
17844 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17845 the image into a float, see section
17846 \begin_inset space ~
17850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17852 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17859 \begin_layout Subsection
17861 \begin_inset Index idx
17864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17873 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17880 \begin_layout Standard
17881 You can insert images in any known file format.
17882 But as we explained in section
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17889 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17893 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17894 LyX therefore uses the program
17898 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17899 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17900 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17901 \begin_inset space ~
17905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17907 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17914 \begin_layout Standard
17915 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17918 \begin_layout Description
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17923 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17924 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17925 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17929 Graphics Interchange Format
17930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 (GIF, file extension
17934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17946 \begin_inset Index idx
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17981 Portable Network Graphics
17982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17985 (PNG, file extension
17986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17998 \begin_inset Index idx
18001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18033 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18037 (JPG, file extension
18038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18062 \begin_inset Index idx
18065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18096 \begin_layout Description
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18101 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18103 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18104 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18105 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18106 \begin_inset Newline newline
18109 Scalable image formats can be
18110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18113 Scalable Vector Graphics
18114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18117 (SVG, file extension
18118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18130 \begin_inset Index idx
18133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18165 Encapsulated PostScript
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18169 (EPS, file extension
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18182 \begin_inset Index idx
18185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18217 Portable Document Format
18218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18221 (PDF, file extension
18222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18234 \begin_inset Index idx
18237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18252 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18253 result will not be scalable.
18254 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18260 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18276 \begin_layout Subsection
18277 Grouping of Image Settings
18278 \begin_inset Index idx
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18282 Images ! Settings grouping
18290 \begin_layout Standard
18291 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18293 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18294 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18296 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18297 need to manually change each of them.
18301 \begin_layout Standard
18302 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18305 \begin_inset space ~
18309 \begin_inset space ~
18324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18332 \begin_inset space ~
18336 \begin_inset space ~
18343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18353 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18354 and checking the name of the desired group.
18357 \begin_layout Section
18359 \begin_inset Index idx
18362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18378 \begin_layout Standard
18379 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18382 arg "tabular-insert"
18387 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18391 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18392 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18393 from the rest of the table.
18394 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18395 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18397 Here is an example table:
18400 \begin_layout Standard
18402 \begin_inset Tabular
18403 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18404 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_layout Subsection
18612 \begin_layout Standard
18613 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18616 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18620 This brings up the table dialog.
18621 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18622 cursor is placed currently.
18623 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18624 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18625 done on all of your selection.
18628 \begin_layout Standard
18629 In addition to the table dialog, the
18632 \begin_inset space ~
18637 helps you in setting table properties.
18638 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18641 \begin_layout Standard
18645 \begin_inset space ~
18650 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18651 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18652 current cell respectively.
18653 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18655 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18656 of text, see section
18657 \begin_inset space ~
18661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18663 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18670 \begin_layout Standard
18671 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18672 using the check box
18681 This will merge the cells to
18685 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18686 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18687 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18688 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18689 in the last row without the upper border:
18692 \begin_layout Standard
18694 \begin_inset Tabular
18695 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18696 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18698 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18699 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18796 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 \begin_layout Standard
18832 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18833 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18834 explained in the chapter
18841 \begin_inset space ~
18847 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18851 degrees counterclockwise.
18852 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18856 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 Most DVI-viewers are
18868 able to display rotations.
18876 \begin_layout Standard
18881 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18886 adds lines for all cell borders.
18889 \begin_layout Subsection
18891 \begin_inset Index idx
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 Tables ! Longtables
18901 \begin_inset Index idx
18904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 \begin_layout Standard
18914 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18917 \begin_inset space ~
18921 \begin_inset space ~
18930 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18931 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18934 \begin_layout Description
18939 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18940 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18941 except for the first page, if
18944 \begin_inset space ~
18952 \begin_layout Description
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18961 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18962 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18965 \begin_layout Description
18970 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18971 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18972 except for the last page, if
18975 \begin_inset space ~
18983 \begin_layout Description
18987 \begin_inset space ~
18992 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18993 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18996 \begin_layout Description
18997 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18998 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19000 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19004 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19007 \begin_inset space ~
19015 \begin_layout Standard
19016 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19017 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19018 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19024 In this context, first means first in this order:
19027 \begin_inset space ~
19039 \begin_inset space ~
19044 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19047 \begin_layout Standard
19049 \begin_inset Tabular
19050 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19051 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19052 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19053 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19054 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19055 <row endfirsthead="true">
19056 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19067 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19076 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19086 <row endfirsthead="true">
19087 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19098 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 <row endhead="true">
19120 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19131 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 <row endhead="true">
19151 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 <row endfoot="true">
19184 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <row endlastfoot="true">
21166 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 \begin_layout Subsection
21205 \begin_inset Index idx
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21217 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21224 \begin_layout Standard
21225 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21226 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21227 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21228 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21232 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21235 \begin_layout Standard
21236 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21237 for the column in the table dialog.
21238 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21239 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21243 \begin_layout Standard
21245 \begin_inset Tabular
21246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21247 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21249 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 This is longer now.
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21452 This is longer now.
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 \begin_layout Standard
21484 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21485 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21491 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21497 Selection with the mouse or with
21501 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21502 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21503 the selection from outside the table.
21506 \begin_layout Section
21508 \begin_inset Index idx
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21527 \begin_layout Subsection
21531 \begin_layout Standard
21532 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21533 have a fixed location.
21535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21542 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21550 \begin_inset space ~
21555 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21556 too many notes on the current page.
21559 \begin_layout Standard
21560 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21561 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21562 and pages without text.
21563 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21564 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21565 Floats are therefore numbered.
21566 Referencing is described in section
21567 \begin_inset space ~
21571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21573 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21580 \begin_layout Standard
21581 To insert a float, use the menu
21583 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21587 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21588 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21590 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21591 \begin_inset Index idx
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21601 paragraph within the float.
21602 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21603 by left-clicking on the box label.
21604 A closed float box looks like this:
21605 \begin_inset Graphics
21606 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21611 – a gray button with a red label.
21614 \begin_layout Standard
21615 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21616 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21619 \begin_layout Subsection
21623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21627 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21632 \begin_inset Index idx
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 Floats ! Figure floats
21644 \begin_layout Standard
21646 \begin_inset space ~
21650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21652 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21656 was created using the menu
21658 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21659 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21665 arg "float-insert figure"
21669 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21672 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21678 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21682 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21683 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21685 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21687 \begin_inset space ~
21695 arg "layout-paragraph"
21701 \begin_layout Standard
21702 \begin_inset Float figure
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 \begin_inset Graphics
21710 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21725 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21729 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21742 \begin_layout Standard
21743 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21744 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21746 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21755 ) and refer to it using the menu
21757 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21763 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21767 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21768 vague references like
21769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21776 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21786 For more about cross-references, see section
21787 \begin_inset space ~
21791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21793 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21800 \begin_layout Standard
21801 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21802 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21803 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21804 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21805 as described in section
21806 \begin_inset space ~
21810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21812 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21818 \begin_inset space ~
21822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21824 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21828 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21829 You can also set the images one below the other.
21831 \begin_inset space ~
21835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21837 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21844 reference "fig:Platypus"
21848 are the subfigures.
21851 \begin_layout Standard
21852 \begin_inset Float figure
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21858 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21862 \begin_inset Float figure
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21873 name "fig:Undefinable"
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 \begin_inset Graphics
21887 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21898 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21902 \begin_inset Float figure
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21913 name "fig:Platypus"
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 \begin_inset Graphics
21927 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21939 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21951 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21955 Two distorted images.
21968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21970 \begin_inset Index idx
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 Floats ! Table floats
21982 \begin_layout Standard
21983 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21985 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21986 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21989 or the toolbar button
21992 arg "float-insert table"
21996 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21997 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21998 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22000 \begin_inset space ~
22004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22006 reference "tab:Table-float"
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 \begin_inset Float table
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22025 name "tab:Table-float"
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 \begin_inset Tabular
22040 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22041 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22192 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22195 \end{array}\right]$
22203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22237 \begin_layout Subsection
22239 \begin_inset Index idx
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 \begin_layout Standard
22252 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22253 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22254 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22256 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22264 \begin_inset space ~
22272 \begin_layout Section
22274 \begin_inset Index idx
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 \begin_layout Standard
22287 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22289 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22290 \begin_inset space \space{}
22297 \begin_layout Standard
22298 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22300 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22304 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22305 and its alignment within the page.
22308 \begin_layout Standard
22310 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22320 height_special "totalheight"
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 This is a minipage.
22327 The text is set in an italic style.
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22334 another formatting.
22342 \begin_layout Standard
22343 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22346 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22350 as described in section
22351 \begin_inset space ~
22355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22357 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22362 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22368 \begin_layout Standard
22369 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22379 height_special "totalheight"
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22383 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22384 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22394 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22404 height_special "totalheight"
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22409 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22417 \begin_layout Standard
22418 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22424 \begin_layout Standard
22425 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22427 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22434 \begin_inset space ~
22442 \begin_layout Chapter
22443 Mathematical Formulas
22444 \begin_inset Index idx
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 \begin_inset Index idx
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22488 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22495 \begin_layout Standard
22496 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22501 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22504 \begin_layout Section
22506 \begin_inset Index idx
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22519 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22532 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22534 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22535 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22536 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22538 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22544 \begin_layout Standard
22545 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22549 \begin_inset space ~
22554 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22557 \begin_layout Standard
22558 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22559 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22562 \begin_layout Standard
22563 This is a line with an inline formula
22564 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22570 \begin_layout Standard
22571 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22572 paragraph, like this one:
22573 \begin_inset Formula
22580 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22583 \begin_layout Standard
22584 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22585 For example, typing
22586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22599 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22600 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22604 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22607 \begin_inset space ~
22615 \begin_layout Subsection
22616 Navigating in Formulas
22617 \begin_inset Index idx
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 \begin_layout Standard
22630 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22631 achieved with the arrow keys.
22632 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22633 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22638 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22639 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22643 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22647 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22650 \end{array}\right]$
22658 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22663 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22664 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22667 \begin_layout Standard
22672 , printed in this document as
22673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22677 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22684 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22685 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22686 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22691 For example, if you want
22692 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22700 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22710 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22714 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22719 , since in the latter case only the
22722 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22727 will be under the square root sign:
22728 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22734 \begin_layout Standard
22735 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22737 \begin_inset Formula
22739 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22748 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22749 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22752 \begin_layout Subsection
22756 \begin_layout Standard
22757 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22758 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22762 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22763 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22764 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22765 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22766 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22769 \begin_layout Subsection
22770 Exponents and Subscripts
22771 \begin_inset Index idx
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 \begin_inset Index idx
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 \begin_layout Standard
22794 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22797 arg "math-superscript"
22803 arg "math-subscript"
22806 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22808 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22811 , type in a formula
22814 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22824 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22830 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22834 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22840 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22846 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22855 , you have to use an extra
22859 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22860 For example, if you want
22861 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22867 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22873 Subscripts are similar: To get
22874 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22880 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22888 \begin_layout Subsection
22890 \begin_inset Index idx
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 \begin_layout Standard
22903 Create a fraction either with the command
22909 or by using the icon
22912 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22918 \begin_inset space ~
22924 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22925 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22926 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22931 To move back up, press
22936 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22937 \begin_inset Formula
22939 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22942 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22950 \begin_layout Subsection
22952 \begin_inset Index idx
22955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 \begin_layout Standard
22965 Roots can be created using the
22968 \begin_inset space ~
22976 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22982 arg "math-insert \\root"
23004 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23010 always produces a square root.
23013 \begin_layout Subsection
23014 Operators with Limits
23015 \begin_inset Index idx
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 \begin_inset Index idx
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23037 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23044 \begin_layout Standard
23046 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23050 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23053 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23054 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23055 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23056 The sum operator will automatically place its
23057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23064 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23066 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23070 \begin_inset Formula
23072 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23077 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23081 \begin_layout Standard
23082 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23084 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23085 behind the operator and using the menu
23087 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23088 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23090 \begin_inset space ~
23094 \begin_inset space ~
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23118 \begin_inset Index idx
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 \begin_inset Formula
23130 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23135 which will place the
23136 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23148 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23149 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23155 \begin_layout Standard
23156 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23163 Have a look at section
23164 \begin_inset space ~
23168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23170 reference "sub:Functions"
23174 for an explanation of function macros.
23177 \begin_layout Subsection
23179 \begin_inset Index idx
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 \begin_layout Standard
23192 Most math symbols can be found in the
23195 \begin_inset space ~
23200 under one of several categories; including
23217 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23221 \begin_layout Standard
23222 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23223 you don't have to use the
23226 \begin_inset space ~
23231 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23232 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23235 \begin_layout Subsection
23237 \begin_inset Index idx
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 \begin_layout Standard
23250 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23261 \begin_inset space ~
23269 arg "math-insert \\space"
23273 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23274 For example, the sequence
23279 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23283 \begin_inset Graphics
23284 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23289 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23290 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23291 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23292 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23294 Here are two examples:
23297 \begin_layout Standard
23307 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23313 \begin_layout Standard
23323 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23329 \begin_layout Subsection
23331 \begin_inset Index idx
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23343 name "sub:Functions"
23350 \begin_layout Standard
23354 \begin_inset space ~
23359 contains under the button
23362 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23365 a number of function macros, such as
23366 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23370 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23378 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23385 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23386 avoid confusions, because
23387 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23391 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23397 \begin_layout Standard
23398 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23400 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23404 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23410 \begin_layout Standard
23411 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23412 are placed, as described in section
23413 \begin_inset space ~
23417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23419 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23426 \begin_layout Subsection
23428 \begin_inset Index idx
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 \begin_layout Standard
23441 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23443 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23444 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23445 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23448 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23449 Our example is entered by typing
23454 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23461 \begin_inset space ~
23465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23467 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23471 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23474 \begin_layout Standard
23475 \begin_inset Float table
23480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23486 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23490 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 \begin_inset Tabular
23501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23502 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23503 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23504 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23697 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23805 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24087 \begin_layout Standard
24088 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24091 \begin_inset space ~
24099 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24102 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24106 \begin_layout Section
24107 Brackets and Delimiters
24108 \begin_inset Index idx
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_inset Index idx
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24130 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24137 \begin_layout Standard
24138 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24139 For some purposes, using just the keys
24144 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24145 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24146 toolbar delimiter icon
24149 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24153 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24154 \begin_inset Formula
24156 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24164 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24165 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24169 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24172 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24178 \begin_inset Formula
24180 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24188 \begin_layout Standard
24189 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24190 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24194 \begin_layout Standard
24195 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24196 left side and right side.
24197 If you use the option
24200 \begin_inset space ~
24205 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24206 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24207 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24212 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24215 \begin_layout Standard
24216 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24217 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24218 is to go inside the brackets.
24219 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24224 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24225 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24226 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24230 arg "math-delim ( )"
24236 \begin_layout Section
24237 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24238 \begin_inset Index idx
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 \begin_inset Index idx
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 \begin_inset Index idx
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24270 \begin_layout Standard
24271 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24274 \begin_inset space ~
24282 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24286 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24287 Here is an example:
24288 \begin_inset Formula
24290 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24299 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24300 \begin_inset space ~
24304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24306 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24311 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24312 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24313 This alignment is set in the box
24318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24366 for every column as default.
24367 For example, the sequence
24368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24379 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24380 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24381 corresponds to the relevant column.
24382 The result will look like this:
24383 \begin_inset Formula
24386 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24387 column & has & has\, right\\
24388 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24397 \begin_layout Standard
24398 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24401 arg "newline-insert newline"
24404 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24405 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24407 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24410 or the math toolbar.
24413 \begin_layout Standard
24414 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24415 It can be created with the menu
24417 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24418 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24420 \begin_inset space ~
24432 Here is an example:
24433 \begin_inset Formula
24447 \begin_layout Standard
24448 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24451 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24454 arg "newline-insert newline"
24458 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24463 arg "newline-insert newline"
24466 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24474 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24475 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24476 A new row is created by every further entry of
24479 arg "newline-insert newline"
24483 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24484 Here is an example:
24485 \begin_inset Formula
24487 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24488 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24493 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24494 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24495 \begin_inset Formula
24497 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24506 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24513 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24514 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24517 reference "eq:asquared"
24522 The other types are described in section
24523 \begin_inset space ~
24527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24529 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24536 \begin_layout Section
24537 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24538 \begin_inset Index idx
24541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24542 Math ! Formula numbering
24548 \begin_inset Index idx
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 Math ! Referencing formulas
24558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24560 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24567 \begin_layout Standard
24568 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24570 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24571 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24573 \begin_inset space ~
24577 \begin_inset space ~
24585 arg "math-number-toggle"
24589 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24590 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24591 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24592 the document class.
24593 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24594 separated by a dot:
24595 \begin_inset Formula
24605 arg "math-number-toggle"
24608 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24609 You can only number displayed formulas.
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24615 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24616 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24618 \begin_inset space ~
24622 \begin_inset space ~
24630 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24633 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24634 \begin_inset Formula
24637 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24643 To number all lines use the shortcut
24646 arg "math-number-toggle"
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24656 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24657 A label is inserted with the menu
24659 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24668 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24669 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24670 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24682 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24683 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24684 We inserted in the following example the label
24685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24692 in the second line:
24693 \begin_inset Formula
24695 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24696 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24701 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24702 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24703 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24705 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24707 \begin_inset space ~
24715 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24719 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24720 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24721 as the formula number:
24724 \begin_layout Standard
24725 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24728 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24736 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24743 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24748 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24756 \begin_layout Section
24757 User defined math macros
24758 \begin_inset Index idx
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24770 \begin_layout Standard
24771 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24772 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24773 Math macros are explained in section
24776 \begin_inset space ~
24788 \begin_layout Section
24792 \begin_layout Subsection
24794 \begin_inset Index idx
24797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 \begin_layout Standard
24807 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24808 To set a font in a formula, use the
24811 \begin_inset space ~
24819 arg "math-insert \\font"
24822 , or enter its command, listed in table
24823 \begin_inset space ~
24827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24829 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 \begin_inset Float table
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24843 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24848 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24852 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 \begin_inset Tabular
24863 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24864 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24985 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25012 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 \begin_layout Standard
25135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25159 \begin_layout Standard
25160 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25161 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25166 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25167 space when you need a space in the box.
25168 Here is an example where
25169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25180 denotes the set of numbers:
25181 \begin_inset Formula
25183 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25192 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25193 You can, for example, put a character in
25202 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25206 \begin_inset Newline newline
25209 So it is better not to use this feature.
25212 \begin_layout Standard
25213 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25214 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25218 \begin_inset Newline newline
25221 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25227 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25228 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25234 \begin_layout Standard
25241 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25244 \begin_layout Standard
25245 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25247 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25248 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25250 \begin_inset space ~
25258 \begin_layout Subsection
25260 \begin_inset Index idx
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 \begin_layout Standard
25273 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25275 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25279 \begin_inset space ~
25283 \begin_inset space ~
25291 \begin_inset space ~
25299 arg "math-insert \\font"
25303 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25304 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25305 Here is an example:
25306 \begin_inset Formula
25309 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25310 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25319 \begin_layout Subsection
25321 \begin_inset Index idx
25324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 \begin_layout Standard
25334 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25335 automatically chosen in most situations.
25353 For most characters,
25361 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25362 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25367 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25368 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25370 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25373 arg "math-insert \\style"
25377 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25378 For example, you can set
25379 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25382 , which is normally in
25391 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25395 The four styles are used in the following example:
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25399 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25403 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25407 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25411 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25418 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25419 is set in a particular size with the menu
25421 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25423 \begin_inset space ~
25428 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25429 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25430 will be adjusted to correspond.
25431 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25442 \begin_layout Standard
25446 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25452 \begin_layout Section
25454 \begin_inset Index idx
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 \begin_inset Index idx
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25476 \begin_layout Standard
25477 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25478 (AMS) that are in common use.
25481 \begin_layout Subsection
25482 Enabling AMS-Support
25485 \begin_layout Standard
25486 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25487 the document by selecting the checkbox
25490 \begin_inset space ~
25494 \begin_inset space ~
25498 \begin_inset space ~
25505 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25509 \begin_inset Index idx
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 Document ! Settings
25521 \begin_inset space ~
25527 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25528 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25531 \begin_layout Subsection
25533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25535 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25540 \begin_inset Index idx
25543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25552 \begin_layout Standard
25553 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25554 LyX allows you to choose between
25575 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25582 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25585 \begin_layout Chapter
25589 \begin_layout Section
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25603 name "sec:Cross-References"
25610 \begin_layout Standard
25611 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25612 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25614 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25615 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25616 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25619 \begin_layout Enumerate
25623 \begin_layout Enumerate
25624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25626 name "enu:Second-item"
25633 \begin_layout Enumerate
25637 \begin_layout Standard
25638 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25640 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25643 or by pressing the toolbar button
25650 A gray label box like this:
25651 \begin_inset Graphics
25652 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25657 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25658 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25693 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25694 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25716 or the toolbar button
25719 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25723 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25724 \begin_inset Graphics
25725 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25730 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25732 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25745 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25749 \begin_layout Standard
25750 As an alternative to
25752 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25755 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25760 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25761 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25763 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25775 \begin_layout Standard
25776 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25777 \begin_inset space ~
25781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25783 reference "enu:Second-item"
25790 \begin_layout Standard
25791 It is recommended to use a protected space
25795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25796 described in section
25797 \begin_inset space ~
25801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25803 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25812 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25813 line breaks between them.
25816 \begin_layout Standard
25817 There are six formats of cross-references:
25820 \begin_layout Description
25821 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25824 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25831 \begin_layout Description
25832 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25833 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25845 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25852 \begin_layout Description
25853 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25854 \begin_inset space ~
25858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25859 LatexCommand pageref
25860 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25867 \begin_layout Description
25869 \begin_inset space ~
25873 \begin_inset space ~
25876 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25878 LatexCommand vpageref
25879 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25884 \begin_inset Newline newline
25887 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25888 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25889 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25890 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25891 it prints “on the next page”.
25892 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25895 \begin_layout Description
25897 \begin_inset space ~
25901 \begin_inset space ~
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25908 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25911 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25916 \begin_inset Newline newline
25919 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25925 ; otherwise it behaves like
25929 \begin_inset space ~
25933 \begin_inset space ~
25942 \begin_layout Description
25944 \begin_inset space ~
25947 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25948 \begin_inset Newline newline
25952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25960 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25969 \begin_inset Index idx
25972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25979 \begin_inset Index idx
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25983 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25994 \begin_inset Newline newline
25997 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26000 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26004 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26005 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26013 is the default and preferred because
26017 supports only English documents.
26018 The format is specified by using the command
26030 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26031 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26044 ) can be done with this command
26045 \begin_inset Newline newline
26052 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26057 \begin_inset Newline newline
26060 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26064 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26071 \begin_layout Description
26073 \begin_inset space ~
26076 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26078 LatexCommand nameref
26079 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26086 \begin_layout Standard
26087 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26088 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26089 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26093 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26097 \begin_layout Standard
26098 You can only use the style
26102 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26106 is always possible.
26109 \begin_layout Standard
26110 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26111 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26113 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26114 \begin_inset space ~
26118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26120 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26127 \begin_layout Standard
26128 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26132 \begin_inset space ~
26136 \begin_inset space ~
26141 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26142 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26145 \begin_inset space ~
26150 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26151 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26154 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26160 \begin_layout Standard
26161 You can change labels at any time.
26162 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26163 do not need to think about this.
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26167 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26168 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26169 instead of the reference.
26172 \begin_layout Standard
26173 References are described in detail in the section
26174 \begin_inset space ~
26178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26188 \begin_inset space ~
26196 \begin_layout Section
26197 Table of Contents and other Listings
26198 \begin_inset Index idx
26201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 \begin_inset Index idx
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26227 \begin_layout Subsection
26229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26231 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26241 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26242 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26254 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26255 If you click on it, the
26259 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26260 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26261 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26263 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26265 \begin_inset space ~
26270 that is described in section
26271 \begin_inset space ~
26275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26277 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26284 \begin_layout Standard
26285 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26286 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26288 \begin_inset space ~
26292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26294 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26298 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26306 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26310 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26312 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26315 \begin_layout Subsection
26316 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26319 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26326 \begin_layout Standard
26327 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26329 You can insert them via the
26331 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26335 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26338 \begin_layout Section
26339 URLs and Hyperlinks
26340 \begin_inset Index idx
26343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 \begin_inset Index idx
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26362 \begin_layout Subsection
26364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26373 \begin_layout Standard
26374 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26376 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26384 \begin_inset Flex URL
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 \begin_layout Standard
26398 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26404 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26408 \begin_layout Standard
26409 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26425 \begin_layout Subsection
26427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26429 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26439 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26442 or with the toolbar button
26449 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26458 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26459 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26462 name "LyX's homepage"
26463 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26467 , an Email address like this:
26468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26470 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26471 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26476 , or a link to a file.
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26493 to the link target.
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26497 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26498 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26499 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26500 the text style dialog.
26501 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26505 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26507 name "LyX's homepage"
26508 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26520 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26522 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26523 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26527 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26529 \begin_inset Newline newline
26537 \begin_inset Newline newline
26544 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26547 \begin_layout Section
26549 \begin_inset Index idx
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26561 name "sec:Appendices"
26568 \begin_layout Standard
26569 Appendices are created with the menu
26571 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26583 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26584 as the appendix part of the book.
26585 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26590 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26591 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26592 and the subsection number.
26593 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26597 \begin_layout Standard
26599 \begin_inset space ~
26603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26605 reference "chap:Credits"
26610 \begin_inset space ~
26614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26616 reference "sub:Export"
26623 \begin_layout Section
26625 \begin_inset Index idx
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26637 name "sec:Bibliography"
26644 \begin_layout Standard
26645 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26646 You can include a bibliography database,
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 Known under the name
26652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26664 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26665 manually, using the paragraph environment
26669 , which was described in section
26670 \begin_inset space ~
26674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26676 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26681 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26682 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26686 use a bibliography database.
26689 \begin_layout Subsection
26690 The Bibliography Environment
26693 \begin_layout Standard
26698 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26700 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26709 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26711 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26720 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26724 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26726 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26729 or the toolbar button
26732 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26736 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26737 containing the available citations.
26738 Select one or more keys from the list and
26748 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26749 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26753 \begin_layout Standard
26754 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26755 entry with surrounding brackets.
26760 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26761 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26773 \begin_layout Standard
26776 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26781 key "latexcompanion"
26788 \begin_layout Standard
26789 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26799 \begin_layout Standard
26800 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26803 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26805 \begin_inset space ~
26813 arg "layout-paragraph"
26817 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26820 \begin_layout Subsection
26821 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26822 \begin_inset Index idx
26825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 Bibliography ! Databases
26832 \begin_inset Index idx
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26836 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26844 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26851 \begin_layout Standard
26852 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26860 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26861 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26866 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26868 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26869 your working field in a database.
26870 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26871 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26872 list for that document.
26873 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26877 \begin_layout Standard
26878 The database is a text file with the file extension
26879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26890 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26891 The format is explained in
26892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26898 and in the LaTeX books (
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26901 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26906 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26907 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26908 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26909 \begin_inset Flex URL
26912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26914 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26922 \begin_layout Standard
26923 To use a database, use the menu
26925 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26930 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26943 \begin_inset space ~
26949 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26950 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26957 Add bibliography to TOC
26959 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26964 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26965 in the document or just the cited references.
26968 \begin_layout Standard
26969 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26981 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26982 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26983 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26985 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26991 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26992 \begin_inset Newline newline
26996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26998 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27010 \begin_layout Standard
27011 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27014 \begin_layout Standard
27015 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27016 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27022 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27023 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27028 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27029 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27030 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27045 The following variants are possible:
27048 \begin_layout Description
27049 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27050 with other bibliography packages (e.
27051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27055 \begin_inset space \space{}
27062 ), only with the package
27066 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27070 \begin_layout Description
27071 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27072 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27073 with all bibliography packages, except
27078 \begin_layout Description
27079 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27084 , works with all bibliography packages
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27090 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27096 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27106 When you select the option
27108 Sectioned bibliography
27112 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27113 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27116 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27117 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27119 Customizing Bibliographies
27127 Additional Features
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27134 the two methods of creating them.
27135 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27136 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27137 We used the style file
27141 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27144 \begin_layout Subsection
27145 Bibliography layout
27146 \begin_inset Index idx
27149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27150 Bibliography ! Layout
27158 \begin_layout Standard
27159 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27160 For this feature you need to enable the option
27166 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27170 \begin_inset Index idx
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27174 Document ! Settings
27184 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27185 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27186 in the previous section.
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27191 the citation reference window.
27192 Here is an example where the text
27193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27197 \begin_inset space ~
27201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27204 appears after the reference:
27207 \begin_layout Standard
27209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27212 key "latexcompanion"
27219 \begin_layout Section
27221 \begin_inset Index idx
27224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27240 \begin_layout Standard
27241 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27245 \begin_inset space ~
27250 or the toolbar button
27257 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27258 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27259 by LyX as the index entry.
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27265 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27266 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27268 \begin_inset space ~
27274 A light blue box labeled
27275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27286 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27287 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27290 \begin_layout Standard
27291 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27292 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27294 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27296 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27303 \begin_layout Subsection
27304 Grouping Index Entries
27305 \begin_inset Index idx
27308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27318 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27320 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27321 lists under the entry
27322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27330 First we create the entry
27331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27339 \begin_inset space ~
27343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27345 reference "sub:Lists"
27350 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27351 \begin_inset space ~
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27357 reference "sec:Itemize"
27361 , we insert the command
27364 \begin_layout Standard
27370 \begin_layout Standard
27374 \begin_layout Standard
27380 \begin_layout Standard
27381 for the enumerated list in section
27382 \begin_inset space ~
27386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27388 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27395 \begin_layout Standard
27396 The exclamation mark
27397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27404 marks the grouping levels.
27405 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27406 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27407 If we don't have an index entry for
27408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27415 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27418 \begin_layout Subsection
27420 \begin_inset Index idx
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27424 Index ! Page ranges
27432 \begin_layout Standard
27433 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27435 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27436 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27437 an index entry in section
27438 \begin_inset space ~
27442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27444 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27451 \begin_layout Standard
27454 Paragraph environments|(
27457 \begin_layout Standard
27458 and another entry at the end of section
27459 \begin_inset space ~
27463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27465 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27475 Paragraph environments|)
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27503 respectively start and end the index range.
27504 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27505 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27506 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27507 An example is the index entry
27508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27511 Document ! Settings
27512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27518 \begin_layout Subsection
27520 \begin_inset Index idx
27523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27524 Index ! Cross referencing
27532 \begin_layout Standard
27533 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27534 We referred for example in the index entry
27535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27543 \begin_inset space ~
27547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27549 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27553 ) to the index entry
27554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27561 in the same section using the entry
27564 \begin_layout Standard
27567 GIF|see{Image formats}
27570 \begin_layout Standard
27571 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27572 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27573 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27576 \begin_layout Subsection
27578 \begin_inset Index idx
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27582 Index ! Entry order
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27591 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27592 follow the rules for the index order.
27593 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27600 \begin_inset space ~
27604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27606 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27615 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27616 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27641 \begin_inset Index idx
27644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27645 Dummy entries ! maïs
27651 \begin_inset Index idx
27654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27655 Dummy entries ! maître
27661 \begin_inset Index idx
27664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27665 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27670 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27671 maïs, maison, maître.
27672 To achieve this, we use the command
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27678 previous entry@current entry
27681 \begin_layout Standard
27682 In our case we want to have
27683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27698 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27709 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27710 See the next subsection for an example.
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27714 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27720 \begin_layout Standard
27721 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27726 to generate the index (see sec.
27727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27733 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27742 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27750 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27754 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27755 index commands start with
27756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27768 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27773 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27800 \begin_layout Subsection
27802 \begin_inset Index idx
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27806 Index ! Entry layout
27814 \begin_layout Standard
27815 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27816 \begin_inset Index idx
27819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27822 This is an italic dummy entry
27827 You can also format the page number using the character
27828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27836 We can write for example
27839 \begin_layout Standard
27842 italic page number:|textit
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27846 to get the page number in italic.
27847 \begin_inset Index idx
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27856 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 \begin_inset space ~
27880 Have a look at section
27881 \begin_inset space ~
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27887 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27891 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27903 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27907 to generate the index, see sec.
27908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27914 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27923 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27928 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27932 key "latexcompanion"
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27945 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27947 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27948 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27949 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27950 If so, put the following in the preamble
27953 \begin_layout Standard
27965 \begin_layout Standard
27969 \begin_layout Standard
27975 \begin_layout Standard
27976 in the index entry.
27977 \begin_inset Index idx
27980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27981 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27986 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27987 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27988 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27993 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27994 a bold font for all index entries.
27995 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28007 documentation for details,
28008 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28010 key "makeindex,xindy"
28017 \begin_layout Subsection
28019 \begin_inset Index idx
28022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28031 name "sub:Index-Program"
28038 \begin_layout Standard
28039 If the index generation program
28043 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28047 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28056 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28057 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28058 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28059 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28060 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28070 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28071 dialog, see section
28072 \begin_inset space ~
28076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28078 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28083 The available options are listed and explained in
28084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28086 key "makeindex,xindy"
28091 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28096 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28097 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28100 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28101 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28105 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28106 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28109 \begin_layout Subsection
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28114 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28115 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28123 next to the standard index.
28124 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28125 that add this feature.
28131 \begin_inset Index idx
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28140 package to generate multiple indexes.
28141 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28146 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28154 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28155 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28156 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28164 \begin_layout Standard
28165 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28167 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28168 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28171 and select the option
28173 Use multiple Indexes
28180 already contains the standard index
28181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28189 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28190 also appear as a heading) to the
28194 input field and press the
28199 The new index now also appears in the list.
28200 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28205 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28208 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28215 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28216 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28217 are additional features:
28220 \begin_layout Itemize
28221 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28222 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28225 \begin_layout Itemize
28226 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28227 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28235 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28236 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28237 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28238 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28241 \begin_layout Section
28242 Nomenclature/Glossary
28243 \begin_inset Index idx
28246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28253 \begin_inset Index idx
28256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28287 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28296 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28297 called nomenclature or glossary.
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28301 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28307 \begin_inset Index idx
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28317 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28318 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28324 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28327 \begin_layout Standard
28328 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28329 and then use the menu
28331 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28337 \begin_inset space ~
28342 or the toolbar button
28345 arg "nomencl-insert"
28350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28361 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28366 The first is the term or
28370 that you wish to define.
28375 of the term or symbol.
28378 \begin_layout Standard
28379 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28387 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28395 \begin_layout Subsection
28396 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28397 \begin_inset Index idx
28400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28401 Nomenclature ! Layout
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28414 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28420 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28428 \begin_inset Newline newline
28436 \begin_inset Newline newline
28442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28449 character starts/ends the formula.
28450 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28462 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28472 \begin_layout Standard
28473 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28474 \begin_inset space ~
28478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28480 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28487 \begin_layout Standard
28491 \begin_inset space ~
28496 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28497 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28502 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28509 in this document is:
28510 \begin_inset Newline newline
28515 dummy entry for the character
28520 \begin_inset Newline newline
28532 \begin_inset space ~
28542 font use the command
28571 \begin_layout Standard
28572 If the characters |
28573 \begin_inset space \space{}
28577 \begin_inset space \space{}
28581 \begin_inset space \space{}
28585 \begin_inset space \space{}
28589 \begin_inset space \space{}
28592 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28593 a quote character in front of them.
28594 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28595 LatexCommand nomenclature
28596 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28597 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28604 \begin_layout Subsection
28605 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28606 \begin_inset Index idx
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28610 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28619 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28620 the symbol definition.
28621 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28623 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28626 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28627 LatexCommand nomenclature
28629 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28636 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28640 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28641 LatexCommand nomenclature
28644 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28649 They will be sorted by
28650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28679 will be sorted before the
28683 since the character
28684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28691 is considered in sorting.
28694 \begin_layout Standard
28695 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28703 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28704 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28706 For the example given, you can insert
28710 in this field for the
28711 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28718 will be located before
28719 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28725 \begin_layout Standard
28726 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28740 \begin_layout Subsection
28741 Nomenclature Options
28742 \begin_inset Index idx
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 Nomenclature ! Options
28754 \begin_layout Standard
28759 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28760 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28763 \begin_layout Description
28764 refeq Appends the phrase
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28780 to every nomenclature entry, where
28786 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28789 \begin_layout Description
28790 refpage Appends the phrase
28791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28806 to every nomenclature entry, where
28812 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28815 \begin_layout Description
28816 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28819 \begin_layout Standard
28820 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28821 class options list in the
28823 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28827 In this document the options
28834 \begin_layout Standard
28835 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28841 \begin_layout Standard
28842 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28843 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28848 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28851 \begin_layout Description
28861 \begin_layout Description
28864 nomrefpage Like the
28871 \begin_layout Description
28874 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28883 \begin_layout Description
28887 \begin_inset space ~
28893 \begin_inset space ~
28898 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28910 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28911 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28922 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28925 \begin_inset Newline newline
28932 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28937 \begin_inset Newline newline
28941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28956 by their translation.
28959 \begin_layout Subsection
28960 Printing the Nomenclature
28961 \begin_inset Index idx
28964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28965 Nomenclature ! Printing
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28976 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28977 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28994 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28995 You can choose between these settings:
28998 \begin_layout Description
28999 Default a space of 1
29000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29006 \begin_layout Description
29008 \begin_inset space ~
29012 \begin_inset space ~
29015 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29018 \begin_layout Description
29019 Custom custom space
29022 \begin_layout Standard
29023 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29032 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29040 For example, in order to change the name to
29044 , add the following line to the preamble:
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29055 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29058 \begin_layout Subsection
29059 Nomenclature Program
29060 \begin_inset Index idx
29063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29064 Nomenclature ! Program
29070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29072 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29079 \begin_layout Standard
29080 LyX uses the program
29084 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29085 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29090 by adding options, see section
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29097 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29102 The available options are listed and explained in
29103 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29105 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29112 \begin_layout Section
29114 \begin_inset Index idx
29117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29124 \begin_inset Index idx
29127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29128 Document ! Branches
29134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29136 name "sec:Branches"
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29144 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29145 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29146 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29147 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29152 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29153 To create a branch, either select the menu
29155 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29156 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29159 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29161 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29168 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29169 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29170 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29171 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29172 (see below for an example).
29173 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29174 to the name of the other) and to add
29175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29187 \begin_inset space ~
29190 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29191 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29194 \begin_layout Standard
29195 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29196 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29198 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29201 where you can choose a branch.
29202 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29206 \begin_layout Standard
29207 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29208 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29212 \begin_inset Branch Question
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29216 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29225 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29229 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29237 \begin_layout Standard
29244 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29245 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29248 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29249 Consider for example a file
29250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29257 which has the above branches.
29259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29266 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29290 branch were inactive,
29291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29306 branch was active, likewise
29307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29322 branch was active, and
29323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29326 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29330 if both branches were active.
29331 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29334 \begin_layout Standard
29335 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29341 \begin_layout Standard
29342 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29343 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29345 For example you can define for the question branch
29349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29350 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29351 \begin_inset space ~
29355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29357 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 and for the answer branch
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29403 \begin_layout Standard
29413 \begin_layout Standard
29414 \begin_inset Branch Question
29417 \begin_layout Standard
29421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29449 \begin_layout Standard
29450 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29486 Now it is possible to use the
29490 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29497 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29500 commands to obtain conditional output.
29501 Here is an example formula where only the
29508 \begin_inset Formula
29510 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29528 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29534 \begin_inset space \space{}
29537 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29538 For this advanced usage, see the
29543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29546 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29553 \begin_layout Section
29555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29557 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29562 \begin_inset Index idx
29565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29574 \begin_layout Standard
29577 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29578 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29581 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29583 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29588 \begin_inset Index idx
29591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29592 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29597 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29598 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29599 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29600 part of the document.
29604 \begin_layout Standard
29605 The header information in the dialog tab
29609 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29610 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29611 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29612 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29616 \begin_inset space ~
29620 \begin_inset space ~
29625 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29626 title and author entries.
29630 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_inset space ~
29638 \begin_inset space ~
29643 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29647 You can specify in the dialog tab
29651 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29656 \begin_inset space ~
29660 \begin_inset space ~
29664 \begin_inset space ~
29669 option allows long links to be split;
29672 \begin_inset space ~
29676 \begin_inset space ~
29680 \begin_inset space ~
29688 \begin_inset space ~
29693 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29696 \begin_inset space ~
29701 colors the different links.
29702 The default colors are:
29705 \begin_layout Labeling
29706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29711 for hyperlinks and URLs
29714 \begin_layout Labeling
29715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29723 \begin_layout Labeling
29724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29733 but you can change these in the field
29738 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29741 \begin_layout Standard
29744 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29752 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29753 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29754 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29757 \begin_layout Standard
29762 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29763 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29764 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29774 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29775 when opening the PDF.
29777 \begin_inset space ~
29780 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29781 \begin_inset space ~
29784 1 will only display the sections.
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29788 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29789 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29795 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29796 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29805 \begin_layout Section
29806 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29809 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29816 \begin_layout Subsection
29818 \begin_inset Index idx
29821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29830 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29837 \begin_layout Standard
29838 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29839 constructs, but not all.
29840 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29841 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29842 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29843 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29844 and their commands.
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29850 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29852 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29865 \begin_inset space ~
29870 or by the toolbar button
29883 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29891 \begin_layout Standard
29892 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29893 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29894 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29895 using the LaTeX-command
29901 , you can write the command part
29907 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29911 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29912 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29913 the following example:
29916 \begin_layout Standard
29917 \begin_inset Graphics
29918 filename clipart/ERT.png
29926 \begin_layout Standard
29930 \begin_layout Standard
29931 This is a line with a
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29967 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29968 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29976 \begin_layout Subsection
29977 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29978 \begin_inset Argument 1
29981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 \begin_inset Index idx
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30000 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30007 \begin_layout Standard
30008 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30009 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30010 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30020 any time if you know the right commands.
30021 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30022 is the end of the day.
30023 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30024 all caption labels bold.
30025 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30027 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30033 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30034 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30045 \begin_layout Standard
30046 As result you find that the package
30051 \begin_inset Index idx
30054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30055 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30061 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30063 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30066 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30081 \begin_inset space ~
30089 \begin_layout Standard
30094 usepackage[options]{package name}
30097 \begin_layout Standard
30098 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30099 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30100 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30103 \begin_layout Standard
30104 In your case the package name is
30109 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30114 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30115 So you add the command
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30123 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30132 For more commands provided by the
30136 package, have a look at its documentation,
30137 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30151 \begin_layout Standard
30152 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30154 For example if you use a
30158 class, you don't need the package
30162 , you can instead write
30165 \begin_layout Standard
30170 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30175 \begin_layout Standard
30176 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30177 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30178 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30185 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30188 \begin_layout Standard
30189 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30190 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30192 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30193 the previous section.
30196 \begin_layout Standard
30197 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30201 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30209 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30215 \begin_layout Standard
30219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 \begin_inset Note Note
30232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30241 \begin_layout Left Header
30242 \begin_inset Argument 1
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30265 \begin_inset Note Note
30268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30269 defines the header line as described below
30277 \begin_layout Center Header
30278 \begin_inset Argument 1
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30290 \begin_layout Right Header
30291 \begin_inset Argument 1
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30315 \begin_layout Left Footer
30316 \begin_inset Argument 1
30319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30340 \begin_layout Center Footer
30341 \begin_inset Argument 1
30344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 \begin_inset Newline newline
30359 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30365 \begin_layout Right Footer
30366 \begin_inset Argument 1
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 \begin_layout Section
30392 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30395 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30400 \begin_inset Index idx
30403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 Document ! Header/Footer line
30410 \begin_inset Index idx
30413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30427 \begin_inset space ~
30438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30444 \begin_inset space ~
30450 As a second step add in the menu
30452 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30453 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30460 Custom Header/Footerlines
30461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30465 This module offers the following 6
30466 \begin_inset space ~
30472 \begin_layout Description
30474 \begin_inset space ~
30478 \begin_inset space ~
30482 \begin_inset space ~
30486 \begin_inset space ~
30490 \begin_inset space ~
30496 \begin_layout Description
30498 \begin_inset space ~
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30506 \begin_inset space ~
30510 \begin_inset space ~
30514 \begin_inset space ~
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30521 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30526 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30528 \begin_inset space ~
30532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30534 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30538 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30541 \begin_layout Standard
30542 \begin_inset Float figure
30548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 \begin_inset Tabular
30552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30553 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30554 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30556 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30605 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30616 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30620 The normal text on the page goes here.
30621 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30623 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30624 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30638 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30696 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30714 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30719 name "fig:Page-layout"
30723 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30736 \begin_layout Standard
30737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30749 \begin_inset space ~
30754 is set to “Default”.
30755 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30764 \begin_layout Subsection
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30770 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30771 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30772 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30774 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30775 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30782 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30803 \begin_layout Description
30806 thepage prints the current page number
30809 \begin_layout Description
30812 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30815 \begin_layout Description
30818 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30821 \begin_layout Description
30824 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30825 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30832 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30835 because it usually goes in a left header.
30838 \begin_layout Description
30841 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30842 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30844 It is normally used in the right header.
30847 \begin_layout Subsection
30848 Default header/footer
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30853 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30854 footer has the page number.
30855 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30856 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30857 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30860 \begin_inset space ~
30868 \begin_layout Subsection
30872 \begin_layout Standard
30873 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30874 Some pages are different.
30875 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30876 a new part or chapter in your book.
30877 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30878 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30879 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30883 Header and footer decoration line
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30887 By default, you get a 0.4
30888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30891 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30892 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30904 in the following way:
30907 \begin_layout Standard
30914 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30917 \begin_layout Standard
30918 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30927 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30934 \begin_layout Standard
30935 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30936 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30937 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30951 Several header/footer lines
30954 \begin_layout Standard
30955 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30956 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30957 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30959 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30973 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30974 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 \begin_inset space ~
30995 \begin_layout Standard
31002 headheight}{height}
31005 \begin_layout Standard
31006 where height is a size in standard units.
31007 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31008 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31009 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31011 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31033 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31038 \begin_inset Index idx
31041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31042 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31048 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31049 for your header/footer.
31052 \begin_layout Subsection
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31057 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31058 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31059 This example consists of the following definition:
31062 \begin_layout Description
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31073 , empty optional argument
31076 \begin_layout Description
31078 \begin_inset space ~
31081 Header empty, empty optional argument
31084 \begin_layout Description
31086 \begin_inset space ~
31095 in the optional argument
31098 \begin_layout Description
31100 \begin_inset space ~
31109 in the optional argument
31112 \begin_layout Description
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31130 \begin_inset Newline newline
31134 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31141 in the optional argument
31144 \begin_layout Description
31146 \begin_inset space ~
31155 , empty optional argument
31158 \begin_layout Description
31161 headrulewidth set to 2
31162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31168 \begin_layout Standard
31169 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31170 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31176 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31185 \begin_layout Standard
31186 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31200 pagestyle{headings}
31206 \begin_inset Note Note
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 switches back to page style with the default headings
31218 \begin_layout Section
31219 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31222 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31227 \begin_inset Index idx
31230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 \begin_inset Index idx
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31250 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31251 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31252 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31255 \begin_layout Subsection
31259 \begin_layout Standard
31260 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31265 \begin_inset Index idx
31268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31269 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31274 (on some systems named simply
31279 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31287 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31288 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31296 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31297 automatically installed together with LyX.
31300 \begin_layout Subsection
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31305 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31306 LaTeX, activate the option
31309 \begin_inset space ~
31316 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31322 \begin_inset space ~
31326 \begin_inset space ~
31329 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31349 \begin_inset space ~
31354 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31362 \begin_inset space ~
31370 \begin_inset space ~
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31392 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31393 generated by activating the option
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31402 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31410 \begin_layout Subsection
31411 Selected document parts
31414 \begin_layout Standard
31415 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31416 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31417 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31418 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31420 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31424 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31425 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31426 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31429 \begin_layout Standard
31430 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31436 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31447 is explained in section
31449 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31454 \begin_inset space ~
31464 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31465 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31467 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31469 Here is the result:
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 \begin_inset Preview
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31484 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31490 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31500 height_special "totalheight"
31503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31528 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31534 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31556 \begin_layout Standard
31557 Previewing works also for colors.
31558 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 is explained in section
31583 \begin_inset space ~
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 \begin_inset Preview
31599 \begin_layout Standard
31603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31622 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31627 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31646 \begin_layout Standard
31647 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31653 \begin_layout Standard
31654 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31655 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31656 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31658 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31659 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31660 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31661 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31665 \begin_layout Subsection
31669 \begin_layout Standard
31670 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31673 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31675 \begin_inset space ~
31680 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31681 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31683 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31684 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31685 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31686 the source view window.
31691 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31692 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31693 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31696 \begin_layout Section
31697 Advanced Find and Replace
31698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31700 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31705 \begin_inset Index idx
31708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 \begin_inset Index idx
31718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31727 \begin_layout Subsection
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31733 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31734 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31735 The key-features are:
31738 \begin_layout Itemize
31739 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31740 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31741 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31745 \begin_layout Itemize
31746 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31747 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31748 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31749 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31752 \begin_layout Itemize
31753 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31754 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31755 outside of mathematics environments
31758 \begin_layout Itemize
31759 Search may be widened to a specific
31764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31768 \begin_inset space ~
31771 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31772 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31779 \begin_layout Itemize
31780 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31781 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31786 \begin_inset space ~
31789 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31792 \begin_layout Subsection
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31799 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31812 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31815 ) or the toolbar button
31818 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31824 Advanced Find and Replace
31829 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31838 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31842 \begin_inset space ~
31847 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31850 arg "break-paragraph"
31854 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31855 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31859 arg "break-paragraph"
31862 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31866 searches backwards.
31869 \begin_layout Standard
31873 \begin_inset space ~
31878 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31892 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31896 Searching for mathematics
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 Mathematical formulas, such as
31901 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31904 or something more complex like
31905 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31908 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31913 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31914 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31915 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31916 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31926 \begin_layout Standard
31927 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31928 This is done by switching to the
31932 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31937 This way, entering in the
31944 \begin_layout Itemize
31945 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31946 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31949 \begin_layout Itemize
31950 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31951 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31954 \begin_layout Itemize
31955 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31956 of it only within section headings.
31957 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31958 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31962 \begin_layout Itemize
31963 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31964 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 The entries made in the
31976 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31979 \begin_inset space ~
31985 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31989 button or alternatively press
31992 arg "break-paragraph"
31999 while the cursor is in the
32002 \begin_inset space ~
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32011 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32012 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32016 \begin_layout Itemize
32017 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32018 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32026 with its typewriter version
32027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32041 \begin_layout Itemize
32042 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32048 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32060 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32067 (you may want to enable the
32070 \begin_inset space ~
32078 \begin_inset space ~
32083 options and disable the
32091 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32099 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32100 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32104 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32107 , or occurrences of
32108 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32112 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32118 \begin_layout Subsection
32122 \begin_layout Standard
32123 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32132 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32141 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32147 This is done with the context menu
32149 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32150 Insert Regular Expression
32152 while the cursor is in the
32157 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32158 expression matching rules
32162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32163 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32169 \begin_inset space ~
32172 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32173 to match expressions.
32178 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32179 same text in the document.
32180 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32181 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32184 \begin_layout Enumerate
32185 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32190 editor the fraction
32191 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32195 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32198 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32199 fractions with the given denominator.
32202 \begin_layout Enumerate
32203 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32215 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32220 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32221 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32222 Also, by inserting a
32223 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32226 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32227 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32231 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32232 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32233 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32236 , and referring back to them through
32237 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32241 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32245 For example, try searching with the regexp
32246 \begin_inset Newline newline
32249 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32252 \begin_inset Newline newline
32255 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32259 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32262 \begin_layout Standard
32263 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32271 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32272 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32273 sub-expressions is absolute.
32275 \begin_inset space ~
32279 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32282 always refers to the first occurrence of
32283 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32286 in all entered regexps.
32294 \begin_layout Section
32296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32298 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32303 \begin_inset Index idx
32306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32315 \begin_layout Standard
32316 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32319 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32326 key or the toolbar button
32329 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32332 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32333 beginning of the currently selected text.
32334 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32335 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32336 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32337 scrolled so that it is visible.
32338 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32339 n, if any could be found.
32340 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32344 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32345 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32348 \begin_layout Standard
32349 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32352 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32356 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32357 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32358 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32359 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32362 \begin_inset space ~
32370 arg "dialog-show character"
32373 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32374 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32377 \begin_layout Standard
32378 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32379 \begin_inset Newline newline
32383 \begin_inset Flex URL
32386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32388 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32394 \begin_inset Newline newline
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32401 files for each language.
32402 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32403 \begin_inset space ~
32406 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32415 \begin_inset Newline newline
32418 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32419 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32420 but in most cases these are
32436 is the language code.
32439 \begin_layout Subsection
32443 \begin_layout Standard
32446 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32447 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32449 \begin_inset space ~
32452 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32455 you can set the following things:
32458 \begin_layout Description
32460 \begin_inset space ~
32463 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32464 Depending on your platform,
32478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32479 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32480 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32495 \begin_layout Description
32497 \begin_inset space ~
32500 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32501 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32504 \begin_layout Description
32506 \begin_inset space ~
32509 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32515 \begin_inset space \space{}
32519 This should normally not be needed.
32522 \begin_layout Description
32524 \begin_inset space ~
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32531 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32543 \begin_layout Description
32545 \begin_inset space ~
32548 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32549 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32550 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32551 appear in a context menu.
32552 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32556 \begin_layout Description
32558 \begin_inset space ~
32562 \begin_inset space ~
32566 \begin_inset space ~
32569 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32573 \begin_layout Section
32575 \begin_inset Index idx
32578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32587 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32594 \begin_layout Standard
32595 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32596 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32608 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32617 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32618 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32619 which are available for many languages.
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32623 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32627 \begin_layout Subsection
32628 Setting up the thesaurus
32631 \begin_layout Standard
32640 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32644 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32649 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32655 \begin_inset space ~
32663 For instance, the US English files are named:
32666 \begin_layout Itemize
32670 \begin_layout Itemize
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32683 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32684 and you just need to point LyX (in
32686 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32687 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32688 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32690 \begin_inset space ~
32695 ) to the path where they are installed.
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32700 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32701 ies, typical locations are
32707 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32711 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32715 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32718 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32724 LibreOffice-<Version>
32731 On the Mac, the default location is
32733 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32734 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32735 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32736 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32737 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32738 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32746 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32747 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32748 correct place right away.
32751 \begin_layout Standard
32752 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32753 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32757 \begin_layout Itemize
32758 \begin_inset Flex URL
32761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32763 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32771 \begin_layout Standard
32772 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32773 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32775 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32776 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32777 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32779 \begin_inset space ~
32785 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32786 and point LyX there.
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32790 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32792 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32795 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32801 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32804 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32812 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32813 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32814 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32821 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32824 \begin_layout Subsection
32825 Using the thesaurus
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32829 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32831 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32834 or the toolbar button
32837 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32840 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32842 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32844 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32845 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32846 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32855 ), related terms (such as
32858 \begin_inset space ~
32867 ), compounds (such as
32870 \begin_inset space ~
32879 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32888 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32891 \begin_layout Standard
32892 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32893 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32898 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32899 the dictionary, such as the above
32903 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32908 \begin_inset space \space{}
32911 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32912 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32913 For example, looking up the word form
32917 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32922 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32927 \begin_inset space \space{}
32938 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32939 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32940 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32943 \begin_layout Section
32945 \begin_inset Index idx
32948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32955 \begin_inset Index idx
32958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32959 Document ! Change Tracking
32965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32967 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32975 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32976 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32977 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32978 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32980 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32985 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32987 \begin_inset space ~
32995 \begin_layout Standard
32996 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33010 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33011 You can change the color in
33013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33014 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33020 \begin_inset space ~
33025 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33031 \begin_inset Index idx
33034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 Color ! Change tracking
33040 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33041 the cursor is in changed text.
33042 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33045 arg "changes-merge"
33051 \begin_layout Standard
33052 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33053 \begin_inset Index idx
33056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33073 \begin_inset Graphics
33074 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33082 \begin_layout Standard
33083 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33090 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33093 \begin_layout Standard
33094 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33100 \begin_layout Standard
33101 \begin_inset Tabular
33102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33103 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33115 arg "changes-track"
33123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33131 \begin_inset space ~
33134 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33136 \begin_inset space ~
33145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33154 arg "changes-output"
33162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33168 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33170 \begin_inset space ~
33173 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33175 \begin_inset space ~
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33213 Jumps to the next change
33219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 arg "change-accept"
33236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33242 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33244 \begin_inset space ~
33247 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33258 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33267 arg "change-reject"
33275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33283 \begin_inset space ~
33286 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33306 arg "changes-merge"
33314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33322 \begin_inset space ~
33325 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33345 arg "all-changes-accept"
33353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33361 \begin_inset space ~
33364 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33366 \begin_inset space ~
33370 \begin_inset space ~
33379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 arg "all-changes-reject"
33396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33404 \begin_inset space ~
33407 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33409 \begin_inset space ~
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33445 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33446 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33539 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33540 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33541 the next change after the current cursor position.
33542 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33543 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33544 step to the next change.
33545 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33548 \begin_layout Standard
33549 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33550 to describe a change.
33553 \begin_layout Standard
33554 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33559 \begin_inset Index idx
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33569 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33570 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33576 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33579 \begin_layout Section
33580 Comparison of Documents
33581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33583 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33588 \begin_inset Index idx
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33592 Comparison of documents
33600 \begin_layout Standard
33601 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33603 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33607 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33609 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33610 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33622 \begin_inset space ~
33631 \begin_inset space ~
33635 \begin_inset space ~
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33643 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33651 \begin_inset space ~
33656 enables the change tracking option
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33663 \begin_inset space ~
33667 \begin_inset space ~
33672 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33675 \begin_layout Section
33676 International Support
33677 \begin_inset Index idx
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33681 International support
33689 \begin_layout Standard
33690 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33691 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33692 up LyX to use them:
33693 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33695 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33702 \begin_layout Standard
33703 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33710 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33717 \begin_layout Subsection
33719 \begin_inset Index idx
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 \begin_inset Index idx
33732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 Document ! Settings
33739 \begin_inset Index idx
33742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 Document ! Language
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33754 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33755 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33758 dialog lets you set
33760 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33765 \begin_layout Standard
33770 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33779 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33780 For details about the different encoding options see section
33781 \begin_inset space ~
33785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33787 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33794 \begin_layout Subsection
33795 Keyboard mapping configuration
33796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33798 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33805 \begin_layout Standard
33806 If you have for example a U.
33807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33810 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33811 can use an alternate keymap.
33812 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33813 use an Italian keymap.
33816 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33817 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33818 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33821 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33822 \begin_inset space ~
33826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33828 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33833 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33834 which one you want to use.
33837 \begin_layout Standard
33838 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33839 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33840 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33844 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33845 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33846 one to support the characters you want.
33847 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33854 \begin_layout Chapter
33857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33859 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33866 \begin_layout Standard
33867 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33868 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33869 topic inside the user's guide.
33872 \begin_layout Section
33874 \begin_inset Index idx
33877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33891 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33894 \begin_layout Subsection
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33899 Creates a new document.
33902 \begin_layout Subsection
33906 \begin_layout Standard
33907 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33908 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33909 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33912 \begin_layout Subsection
33916 \begin_layout Standard
33920 \begin_layout Subsection
33924 \begin_layout Standard
33925 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33926 Click there on a file to open it.
33929 \begin_layout Subsection
33933 \begin_layout Standard
33934 Closes the current document.
33937 \begin_layout Subsection
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 Closes all opened documents.
33945 \begin_layout Subsection
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 Saves the actual document.
33953 \begin_layout Subsection
33957 \begin_layout Standard
33958 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33961 \begin_layout Subsection
33965 \begin_layout Standard
33966 Saves all opened documents.
33969 \begin_layout Subsection
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33977 \begin_layout Subsection
33981 \begin_layout Standard
33982 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33983 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33984 It is described in the section
33986 Version Control in LyX
33990 Additional Features
33995 \begin_layout Subsection
33999 \begin_layout Standard
34000 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34001 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34003 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34006 \begin_layout Standard
34007 When using the menu entry
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34015 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34019 \begin_inset space ~
34023 \begin_inset space ~
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34032 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34033 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34036 \begin_layout Subsection
34038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34047 \begin_layout Standard
34048 You can export your document to various file formats.
34049 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34050 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34051 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34055 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34057 \begin_inset space ~
34061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34063 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34070 \begin_layout Description
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34090 yX format of the special LyX
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34094 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34095 \begin_inset Newline newline
34098 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34101 \begin_layout Description
34102 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34108 \begin_layout Description
34110 \begin_inset space ~
34113 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34119 \begin_layout Description
34120 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34121 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34122 files paths or file names in your document.
34123 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34130 \begin_layout Description
34131 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34132 in files paths or file names
34135 \begin_layout Description
34137 \begin_inset space ~
34144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34151 eX) DVI-format using the program
34155 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34174 \begin_layout Description
34176 \begin_inset space ~
34179 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34183 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34188 \begin_layout Description
34189 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34193 \begin_layout Description
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34202 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34206 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34214 \begin_layout Description
34221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34258 \begin_layout Description
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34278 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34279 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34283 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34286 \begin_layout Description
34293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34301 \begin_inset space ~
34306 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34307 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34315 \begin_layout Description
34322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34330 \begin_inset space ~
34341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34354 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34359 \begin_layout Description
34361 \begin_inset space ~
34365 \begin_inset space ~
34374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34383 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34384 music notation software
34389 \begin_layout Description
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 \begin_inset space ~
34410 \begin_inset space ~
34413 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34414 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34415 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34418 \begin_layout Description
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34435 \begin_inset space ~
34438 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34454 represent the version number)
34457 \begin_layout Description
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34476 \begin_layout Description
34477 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34482 \begin_layout Description
34483 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34485 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34488 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34492 \begin_layout Description
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34501 PDF-format using the program
34505 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34508 \begin_layout Description
34512 \begin_inset space ~
34519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34528 PDF-format using the program
34532 , produces PDF-files directly
34535 \begin_layout Description
34539 \begin_inset space ~
34544 PDF-format using the program
34548 , produces PDF-files directly
34551 \begin_layout Description
34555 \begin_inset space ~
34560 PDF-format using the program
34564 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34567 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34587 PDF-format using the program
34591 , produces PDF-files directly
34594 \begin_layout Description
34598 \begin_inset space ~
34606 \begin_layout Description
34610 \begin_inset space ~
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34619 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34620 and then exported as text using the program
34625 \begin_layout Description
34630 PostScript format using the program
34635 \begin_layout Description
34636 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34637 programming language
34650 it is possible to use
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34658 If one of the menu entries
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34674 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34675 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34682 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34687 \begin_inset Index idx
34690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34691 Reconfiguration of LyX
34699 \begin_layout Subsection
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34705 format or send it to a printer.
34706 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34707 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34713 For more information have a look at section
34714 \begin_inset space ~
34718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34720 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34727 \begin_layout Subsection
34731 \begin_layout Standard
34732 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34733 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34734 prefix, see section
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34741 reference "sec:Paths"
34746 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34755 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34756 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34757 \begin_inset space ~
34761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34763 reference "sub:Converters"
34770 \begin_layout Subsection
34771 New and Close Window
34774 \begin_layout Standard
34775 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34778 \begin_layout Subsection
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34783 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34786 \begin_layout Section
34788 \begin_inset Index idx
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34800 \begin_layout Subsection
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34805 Described in section
34806 \begin_inset space ~
34810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34812 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34819 \begin_layout Subsection
34820 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34824 Described in section
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34831 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34838 \begin_layout Subsection
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34843 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34844 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34847 \begin_layout Subsection
34851 \begin_layout Standard
34852 Selects the whole document.
34855 \begin_layout Subsection
34856 Find & Replace (Quick)
34859 \begin_layout Standard
34860 Described in section
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34867 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34874 \begin_layout Subsection
34875 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 Described in section
34880 \begin_inset space ~
34884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34886 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34893 \begin_layout Subsection
34894 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34898 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34902 \begin_layout Subsection
34906 \begin_layout Standard
34907 Described in section
34908 \begin_inset space ~
34912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34914 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34921 \begin_layout Subsection
34923 \begin_inset Index idx
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 Paragraph ! Settings
34935 \begin_layout Standard
34936 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34937 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34941 \begin_layout Standard
34942 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34943 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34949 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34950 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34960 \begin_layout Subsection
34964 \begin_layout Standard
34965 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34966 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34967 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34974 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34975 The properties of tables are described in section
34976 \begin_inset space ~
34980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34982 reference "sec:Tables"
34986 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34993 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35000 \begin_layout Subsection
35001 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35004 \begin_layout Standard
35005 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35007 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35014 reference "sec:Nesting"
35019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35021 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35028 \begin_layout Section
35030 \begin_inset Index idx
35033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35042 \begin_layout Standard
35043 At the bottom of the
35047 menu the opened documents are listed.
35050 \begin_layout Subsection
35051 Open/Close all Insets
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35058 \begin_layout Subsection
35059 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35066 \begin_layout Standard
35067 Math macros are described in the
35074 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35086 reference "sec:Navigating"
35091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35093 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35100 \begin_layout Subsection
35104 \begin_layout Standard
35105 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35107 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35113 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35120 \begin_layout Subsection
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35125 Opens a window showing console messages.
35126 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35130 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35131 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35134 \begin_layout Subsection
35136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35138 name "sub:Toolbars"
35143 \begin_inset Index idx
35146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35155 \begin_layout Standard
35156 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35157 All toolbars and the
35160 \begin_inset space ~
35165 can be turned on and off.
35170 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35182 \begin_inset space ~
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35199 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35203 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35215 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35219 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35220 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35221 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35222 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35223 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35226 \begin_layout Standard
35227 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35234 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35241 \begin_layout Subsection
35245 \begin_layout Standard
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35274 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35281 \begin_inset space ~
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35289 \begin_inset space ~
35293 \begin_inset space ~
35297 \begin_inset space ~
35302 will split it horizontally.
35303 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35304 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35305 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35306 three or more documents at the same time.
35307 To close a split view, use the menu
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35322 \begin_layout Subsection
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35327 Closes a split view.
35330 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35336 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35337 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35338 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35339 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35342 \begin_layout Section
35344 \begin_inset Index idx
35347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35356 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35361 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35368 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35379 \begin_layout Subsection
35381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35383 name "sub:Special-Character"
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 Here you can insert the following characters:
35394 \begin_layout Description
35399 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35401 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35402 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35403 You can get a complete display by checking
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35412 \begin_inset Newline newline
35416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35424 Not all characters will be visible in the
35428 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35436 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35440 ) can display every character.
35448 \begin_layout Description
35449 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35453 \begin_layout Description
35455 \begin_inset space ~
35459 \begin_inset space ~
35462 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35469 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35476 \begin_layout Description
35478 \begin_inset space ~
35481 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35484 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35485 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35491 \begin_layout Description
35493 \begin_inset space ~
35496 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35499 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35500 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35506 \begin_layout Description
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35511 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35515 \begin_layout Description
35517 \begin_inset space ~
35520 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35524 \begin_layout Description
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35529 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35535 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35541 \begin_layout Description
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35546 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35550 \begin_layout Description
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35556 \begin_inset Index idx
35559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35566 \begin_inset Index idx
35569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35570 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35575 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35576 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35578 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35583 \begin_inset Index idx
35586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35587 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35593 \begin_inset Newline newline
35596 More information about this feature can be found in the
35602 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35608 \begin_layout Subsection
35612 \begin_layout Standard
35613 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35616 \begin_layout Description
35617 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35618 \begin_inset script superscript
35620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35629 \begin_layout Description
35630 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35631 \begin_inset script subscript
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35642 \begin_layout Description
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35647 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35648 \begin_inset space ~
35652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35654 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35661 \begin_layout Description
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35666 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35667 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35673 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35680 \begin_layout Description
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35685 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35692 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35699 \begin_layout Description
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35704 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35710 \begin_inset space \space{}
35713 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35714 An example from the LyX
35719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35722 To insert a fraction use the command
35727 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35731 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35740 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35747 \begin_layout Description
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35752 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35759 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35766 \begin_layout Description
35768 \begin_inset space ~
35771 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35772 \begin_inset space ~
35776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35778 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35785 \begin_layout Description
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35790 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35791 \begin_inset space ~
35795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35797 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35804 \begin_layout Description
35805 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35806 \begin_inset space ~
35810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35812 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35819 \begin_layout Description
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35824 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35831 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35838 \begin_layout Description
35840 \begin_inset space ~
35843 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35844 \begin_inset space ~
35848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35850 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35857 \begin_layout Description
35859 \begin_inset space ~
35863 \begin_inset space ~
35866 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35873 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35880 \begin_layout Description
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35885 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35886 as described in section
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35893 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35900 \begin_layout Description
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35905 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35912 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35919 \begin_layout Description
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35924 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35925 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35927 \begin_inset space ~
35931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35933 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35940 \begin_layout Description
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35945 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35952 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35959 \begin_layout Description
35961 \begin_inset space ~
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35968 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35975 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35982 \begin_layout Subsection
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35991 \begin_inset space ~
36012 are described in section
36013 \begin_inset space ~
36017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36019 reference "sec:toc"
36028 is described in section
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36035 reference "sec:Index"
36043 is described in section
36044 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36050 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36056 BibTeX Bibliography
36058 is described in section
36059 \begin_inset space ~
36063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36065 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36072 \begin_layout Subsection
36076 \begin_layout Standard
36077 To insert floats, as described in section
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36084 reference "sec:Floats"
36088 and in detail the chapter
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36103 \begin_layout Subsection
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 To insert notes, described in section
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36115 reference "sec:Notes"
36122 \begin_layout Subsection
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36129 Branches are described in section
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36136 reference "sec:Branches"
36143 \begin_layout Subsection
36147 \begin_layout Standard
36148 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36149 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36151 An example is the document class
36152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36159 with three custom insets.
36162 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36166 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36172 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36175 \begin_layout Subsection
36177 \begin_inset Index idx
36180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36189 \begin_layout Standard
36190 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36192 For more information see chapter
36194 External Document Parts
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_layout Subsection
36205 \begin_inset Index idx
36208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36218 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36219 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36234 \begin_layout Subsection
36238 \begin_layout Standard
36243 dialog as described in section
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36250 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36257 \begin_layout Subsection
36261 \begin_layout Standard
36266 as described in section
36267 \begin_inset space ~
36271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36273 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36280 \begin_layout Subsection
36284 \begin_layout Standard
36289 as described in section
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36296 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36303 \begin_layout Subsection
36305 \begin_inset Index idx
36308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36315 \begin_inset Index idx
36318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 Longtables ! Caption
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36329 Floats are described in section
36330 \begin_inset space ~
36334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36336 reference "sec:Floats"
36340 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36347 \begin_inset space ~
36355 \begin_layout Subsection
36359 \begin_layout Standard
36360 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36361 \begin_inset space ~
36365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36367 reference "sec:Index"
36374 \begin_layout Subsection
36378 \begin_layout Standard
36379 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36386 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36393 \begin_layout Subsection
36397 \begin_layout Standard
36398 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36399 Tables are described in section
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36406 reference "sec:Tables"
36410 and in detail in the chapter
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_layout Subsection
36429 \begin_layout Standard
36435 Graphics are described in section
36436 \begin_inset space ~
36440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36442 reference "sec:Graphics"
36449 \begin_layout Subsection
36453 \begin_layout Standard
36454 Inserts a URL as described in section
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36461 reference "sub:URLs"
36468 \begin_layout Subsection
36472 \begin_layout Standard
36473 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36480 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36487 \begin_layout Subsection
36491 \begin_layout Standard
36492 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36499 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36506 \begin_layout Subsection
36510 \begin_layout Standard
36511 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36518 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36525 \begin_layout Subsection
36529 \begin_layout Standard
36530 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36531 title or caption of a float.
36532 Inserts a short title as described in section
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36539 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36546 \begin_layout Subsection
36550 \begin_layout Standard
36551 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36558 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36565 \begin_layout Subsection
36567 \begin_inset Index idx
36570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36579 \begin_layout Standard
36580 Inserts a program listings box.
36581 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36583 Program Code Listings
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36596 \begin_layout Subsection
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 Inserts the actual date.
36602 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36604 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36620 \begin_layout Subsection
36624 \begin_layout Standard
36625 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36632 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36639 \begin_layout Section
36641 \begin_inset Index idx
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 \begin_layout Standard
36654 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36655 \begin_inset space ~
36658 of the current document.
36659 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36662 \begin_layout Subsection
36666 \begin_layout Standard
36667 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36668 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36669 to jump, for example, between section
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36678 2.5 and use the submenu
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36708 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36712 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36718 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36721 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36724 \begin_layout Standard
36725 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36734 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36742 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36745 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36749 \begin_layout Standard
36750 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36754 \begin_layout Subsection
36758 \begin_layout Standard
36759 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36760 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36761 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36777 \begin_layout Subsection
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36785 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36787 \begin_inset space ~
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36800 manual for a detailed description.
36803 \begin_layout Section
36805 \begin_inset Index idx
36808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36822 Change Tracking is described in section
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36829 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36851 \begin_layout Standard
36852 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36854 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36855 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36856 to the clipboard or update the view.
36857 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36860 \begin_layout Subsection
36861 Start Appendix Here
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36865 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36866 as described in section
36867 \begin_inset space ~
36871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36873 reference "sec:Appendices"
36880 \begin_layout Subsection
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_layout Standard
36889 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36890 default output format for the document (menu
36892 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36893 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36894 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36912 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36916 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36918 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36919 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36921 \begin_inset space ~
36924 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36926 \begin_inset space ~
36929 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36931 \begin_inset space ~
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36947 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36951 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36952 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36954 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36955 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36960 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36965 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36980 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36981 The default output format is
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36992 \begin_layout Subsection
36993 View (Other Formats)
36996 \begin_layout Standard
36997 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36998 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36999 actual document with an external program.
37000 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37001 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37002 All possible formats are listed in section
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37009 reference "sub:Export"
37014 You should at least see the menu entry
37019 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37020 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37021 \begin_inset space ~
37025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37027 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37032 \begin_inset Index idx
37035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37036 Reconfiguration of LyX
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37046 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37048 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37049 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37054 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37059 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37069 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37074 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37085 \begin_layout Standard
37086 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37087 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37090 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 Update (Other Formats)
37094 \begin_layout Standard
37095 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37096 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37099 \begin_layout Subsection
37100 View Master Document
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37125 manual for more information on this topic).
37126 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37127 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37140 generates the output of the whole book, while
37144 will just output the chapter alone.
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37149 in the document settings (menu
37151 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37152 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37153 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37171 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37175 ) or in the preferences (menu
37177 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37178 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37180 \begin_inset space ~
37183 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37188 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37200 \begin_inset space ~
37204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37206 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37213 \begin_layout Subsection
37214 Update Master Document
37217 \begin_layout Standard
37218 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37239 manual for more information on this topic).
37240 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37241 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37244 \begin_layout Standard
37245 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37246 in the document settings (menu
37248 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37249 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37250 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37268 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37272 ) or in the preferences (menu
37274 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37275 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37280 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37282 \begin_inset space ~
37285 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37287 \begin_inset space ~
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37303 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37310 \begin_layout Subsection
37314 \begin_layout Standard
37315 Un/compresses the current document.
37318 \begin_layout Subsection
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37323 The document settings are described in appendix
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37330 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37337 \begin_layout Section
37339 \begin_inset Index idx
37342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37351 \begin_layout Subsection
37355 \begin_layout Standard
37356 Spell checking is explained in section
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37363 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37370 \begin_layout Subsection
37374 \begin_layout Standard
37375 The thesaurus is described in section
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37382 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37389 \begin_layout Subsection
37391 \begin_inset Index idx
37394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37401 \begin_inset Index idx
37404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 \begin_layout Standard
37414 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37415 the highlighted document part.
37418 \begin_layout Subsection
37423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37431 \begin_inset Index idx
37434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37444 Generates with the help of the program
37448 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37449 This feature is not available on Windows.
37452 \begin_layout Subsection
37457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 \begin_inset Index idx
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37483 \begin_inset space ~
37488 to see the full filename paths.
37491 \begin_layout Subsection
37493 \begin_inset Index idx
37496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37505 \begin_layout Standard
37506 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37513 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37520 \begin_layout Subsection
37522 \begin_inset Index idx
37525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37526 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37537 Reconfiguration of LyX
37541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37554 \begin_inset Index idx
37557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37558 Reconfiguration of LyX
37566 \begin_layout Standard
37567 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37568 needs; see also section
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37575 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37582 \begin_layout Subsection
37586 \begin_layout Standard
37591 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37598 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37605 \begin_layout Section
37607 \begin_inset Index idx
37610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 \begin_layout Standard
37620 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37622 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37626 \begin_layout Standard
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37635 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37636 found by LyX (see also section
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37643 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37650 \begin_layout Standard
37654 \begin_inset space ~
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37670 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37674 \begin_layout Section
37676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37678 name "sec:Toolbars"
37685 \begin_layout Standard
37686 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37693 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37702 This is described in the
37704 Additional Features
37709 \begin_layout Subsection
37711 \begin_inset Index idx
37714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37724 \begin_inset Graphics
37725 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37740 \begin_layout Standard
37741 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37758 \begin_inset Note Note
37761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37762 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37767 manual for more information.
37775 \begin_layout Standard
37776 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37782 \begin_layout Standard
37783 \begin_inset Tabular
37784 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37785 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37786 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 \begin_inset Graphics
37794 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 pull-down box for the environments
37821 \begin_layout Standard
37822 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37828 \begin_layout Standard
37830 \begin_inset Tabular
37831 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37832 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37833 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37834 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37888 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37918 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37934 arg "dialog-show print"
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37948 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37978 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38038 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38098 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38128 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38177 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38226 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38241 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 Emphasize text, function of the
38271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38273 \begin_inset space ~
38276 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38306 Set text to noun style, function of the
38308 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38313 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38331 arg "textstyle-apply"
38339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 Format text using the current settings in the
38345 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38350 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38382 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38383 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 arg "tabular-insert"
38439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38445 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38473 Toggle outline window on/off,
38475 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38491 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38503 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38518 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38530 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38543 \begin_layout Subsection
38545 \begin_inset Index idx
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 \begin_layout Standard
38558 \begin_inset Graphics
38559 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38567 \begin_layout Standard
38568 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38574 \begin_layout Standard
38575 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38579 \begin_layout Standard
38580 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38586 \begin_layout Standard
38587 \begin_inset Tabular
38588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38589 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38590 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38591 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 arg "layout Enumerate"
38636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 arg "layout Itemize"
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 arg "layout Description"
38717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 arg "depth-increment"
38744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38774 arg "depth-decrement"
38782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 arg "float-insert figure"
38820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38826 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38827 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 arg "float-insert table"
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38857 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38858 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38904 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38918 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38948 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38978 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 arg "nomencl-insert"
39006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39012 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39032 arg "footnote-insert"
39040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39110 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39111 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 \begin_inset space ~
39133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39142 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39156 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39266 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39297 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39317 arg "dialog-show character"
39325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39331 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39336 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39352 arg "layout-paragraph"
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39414 \begin_layout Subsection
39415 View/Update Toolbar
39416 \begin_inset Index idx
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39420 Toolbar ! View / Update
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39429 \begin_inset Graphics
39430 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39437 \begin_layout Standard
39438 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39449 \begin_layout Standard
39450 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39456 \begin_layout Standard
39457 \begin_inset Tabular
39458 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39459 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39460 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39461 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39485 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 arg "buffer-update"
39509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 arg "master-buffer-view"
39539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39545 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39547 \begin_inset space ~
39556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39565 arg "master-buffer-update"
39573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39579 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39581 \begin_inset space ~
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39603 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39617 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39618 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39619 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39620 Synchronize with Output
39626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39631 \begin_inset Graphics
39632 filename ../images/view-others.png
39634 groupId toolbarbuttons
39645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39651 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39652 View (Other Formats)
39658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 \begin_inset Graphics
39664 filename ../images/update-others.png
39666 groupId toolbarbuttons
39675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39681 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39682 Update (Other Formats)
39695 \begin_layout Standard
39696 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39700 \begin_layout Subsection
39704 \begin_layout Standard
39705 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39712 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39716 , the table toolbar
39717 \begin_inset Index idx
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 \begin_inset space ~
39734 manual and the math macro toolbar
39735 \begin_inset Index idx
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39751 \begin_layout Chapter
39752 The Document Settings
39753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39755 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39760 \begin_inset Index idx
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 Document ! Settings
39772 \begin_layout Standard
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39781 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39782 is called with the menu
39784 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39788 You can save your document settings as default with the
39790 Save as Document Defaults
39792 button in any dialog.
39793 This will create a template named
39797 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39801 \begin_layout Standard
39806 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39807 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39810 \begin_layout Standard
39811 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39812 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39813 to find the one you are looking for.
39814 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39815 the submenus of the dialog.
39817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39821 \begin_inset space \space{}
39825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39832 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39833 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39834 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39837 \begin_layout Section
39841 \begin_layout Standard
39842 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39844 Document classes are described in section
39845 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39851 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39859 \begin_layout Standard
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39868 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39872 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39873 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39875 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 Some classes use special class options by default.
39886 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39890 and you can decide to use them or not.
39891 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39892 recommended you leave them untouched.
39897 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39902 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39903 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39910 \begin_inset Newline newline
39915 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39918 \begin_inset Newline newline
39921 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39929 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39946 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39947 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39948 document is opened without its master.
39949 This way child documents are always compilable.
39950 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39957 \begin_inset space ~
39965 \begin_layout Standard
39966 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39976 \begin_inset Index idx
39979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39986 \begin_inset Index idx
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39995 for cross-references, see section
39996 \begin_inset space ~
40000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40002 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40009 \begin_layout Section
40013 \begin_layout Standard
40014 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40015 Please refer to the section
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40031 manual for details.
40034 \begin_layout Section
40038 \begin_layout Standard
40039 Modules are explained in section
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40046 reference "sub:Modules"
40053 \begin_layout Section
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40065 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40072 \begin_layout Section
40076 \begin_layout Standard
40077 The document font settings are described in section
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40084 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40091 \begin_layout Section
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40113 and whether it should be a
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40121 can also be specified here.
40124 \begin_layout Standard
40125 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40127 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40129 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40132 \begin_layout Section
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 This dialog is described in sections
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40144 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40151 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40158 \begin_layout Section
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40170 reference "sub:Margins"
40177 \begin_layout Section
40179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40181 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40186 \begin_inset Index idx
40189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40190 Language ! Encoding
40198 \begin_layout Standard
40199 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40200 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40201 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40202 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40203 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40204 known for a particular character).
40208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40214 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40219 manual for details.
40227 \begin_layout Standard
40228 If you use the option
40232 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40233 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40234 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40235 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40236 exactly one encoding.
40237 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40241 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40242 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40243 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40244 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40245 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40246 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40251 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40252 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40253 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40254 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40255 engines to standard LaTeX.
40256 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40257 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 \begin_inset space ~
40286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40310 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40315 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40319 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40331 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40341 The possible settings are:
40344 \begin_layout Description
40345 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40347 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40348 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40358 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40365 \begin_layout Description
40366 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40367 format you will use.
40368 In many cases this will be
40373 \begin_inset Index idx
40376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40377 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40383 If the newer package
40388 \begin_inset Index idx
40391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40392 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40397 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40398 this package will be used instead of
40405 \begin_layout Description
40407 \begin_inset space ~
40418 would be more appropriate.
40421 \begin_layout Description
40422 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40423 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40427 (for German texts), type in
40430 \begin_inset Newline newline
40435 usepackage{ngerman}
40438 \begin_layout Description
40439 None will not use a language package.
40440 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40443 \begin_layout Standard
40444 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40447 \begin_layout Description
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40464 , but the LaTeX-package
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40479 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40480 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40481 languages in TeX code.
40484 \begin_layout Description
40485 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40486 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40487 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40490 \begin_layout Description
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40499 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40502 \begin_layout Description
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40511 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40514 \begin_layout Description
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40519 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40522 \begin_layout Description
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40531 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40532 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40535 \begin_layout Description
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40544 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40548 \begin_layout Description
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40557 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40558 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40561 \begin_layout Description
40563 \begin_inset space ~
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40571 \begin_inset space ~
40574 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_layout Description
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40587 \begin_inset space ~
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40594 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40595 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40598 \begin_layout Description
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40607 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40608 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40609 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40620 \begin_layout Description
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40629 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40630 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40631 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40632 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_layout Description
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40652 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40655 \begin_layout Description
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40664 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40667 \begin_layout Description
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40676 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40679 \begin_layout Description
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40684 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40687 \begin_layout Description
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40692 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40695 \begin_layout Description
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40704 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40707 \begin_layout Description
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset space ~
40719 \begin_layout Description
40721 \begin_inset space ~
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40728 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40731 \begin_layout Description
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40737 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_layout Description
40745 \begin_inset space ~
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40752 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40757 \begin_inset Index idx
40760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40761 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40766 , when using this, set the document language to
40771 \begin_layout Description
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40780 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40784 , when using this, set the document language to
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40793 \begin_layout Description
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset space ~
40802 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40807 \begin_inset Index idx
40810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40811 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40816 , when using this, set the document language to
40821 \begin_layout Description
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40830 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40834 , when using this, set the document language to
40839 \begin_layout Description
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40845 \begin_inset space ~
40848 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40852 , when using this, set the document language to
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40862 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40865 \begin_layout Description
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40875 \begin_inset space ~
40878 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40881 \begin_layout Description
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40895 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40896 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40899 \begin_layout Description
40901 \begin_inset space ~
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40911 \begin_layout Description
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40920 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40921 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40924 \begin_layout Description
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40938 \begin_inset Index idx
40941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40942 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40947 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40950 \begin_layout Description
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40967 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40972 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40974 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40986 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40991 \begin_inset Index idx
40994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40995 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41000 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41008 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41013 \begin_inset Index idx
41016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41017 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41023 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41027 \begin_layout Description
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41040 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_layout Description
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41060 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41061 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41062 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41066 \begin_layout Description
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41079 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41080 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41083 \begin_layout Section
41085 \begin_inset Index idx
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41095 \begin_inset Index idx
41098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 \begin_inset Index idx
41108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41109 Color ! Shaded boxes
41115 \begin_inset Index idx
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41127 \begin_layout Standard
41128 Here you can alter the font color for the
41132 (default: black), for
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41140 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41144 (default: white) and for
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41157 sets the color back to the default.
41160 \begin_layout Standard
41161 Clicking any button showing
41169 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41170 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41171 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41172 later more quickly.
41175 \begin_layout Standard
41176 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41180 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41185 out note appears blue in the output.)
41193 \begin_layout Standard
41194 Note, if you change the
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41202 font color and use the option
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41210 in the document settings under
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41218 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41225 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41232 \begin_layout Standard
41233 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41239 \begin_layout Standard
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41252 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41257 Code after a forced page break:
41260 \begin_layout Itemize
41261 For the page color:
41262 \begin_inset Newline newline
41269 pagecolor{color name}
41272 \begin_layout Itemize
41273 For the text color:
41274 \begin_inset Newline newline
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 You are restricted to one of
41321 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41334 \begin_inset Newline newline
41337 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41338 names to refer to them:
41341 \begin_layout Itemize
41347 \begin_inset Newline newline
41352 page_backgroundcolor
41355 \begin_layout Itemize
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41365 \begin_inset Newline newline
41373 \begin_layout Itemize
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset Newline newline
41391 \begin_layout Itemize
41395 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset Newline newline
41409 \begin_layout Standard
41410 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41414 Cells of the Embedded
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_layout Section
41425 \begin_layout Standard
41426 Here you can adjust the
41430 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41434 as described in section
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41441 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41448 \begin_layout Section
41452 \begin_layout Standard
41453 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41458 \begin_inset Index idx
41461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41472 \begin_inset Index idx
41475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41476 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41484 Sectioned bibliography
41486 using the LaTeX package
41491 \begin_inset Index idx
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41500 and you can select a
41504 for the generation of the bibliography.
41505 For a further description see section
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41512 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41519 \begin_layout Section
41523 \begin_layout Standard
41524 Here you can define the
41528 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:Index"
41543 \begin_layout Section
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41548 The PDF properties are explained in section
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41555 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41562 \begin_layout Section
41566 \begin_layout Standard
41567 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41572 \begin_inset Index idx
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41586 \begin_inset Index idx
41589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41590 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41600 \begin_inset Index idx
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41614 \begin_inset Index idx
41617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41623 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41626 \begin_layout Description
41627 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41628 ensure that you have enabled
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41639 \begin_layout Description
41640 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41655 \begin_layout Description
41656 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41667 \begin_layout Description
41668 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41670 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41679 \begin_layout Section
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41684 The float placement options are described in the section
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41703 \begin_layout Section
41707 \begin_layout Standard
41708 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41710 Program Code Listings
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41723 \begin_layout Section
41727 \begin_layout Standard
41728 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41736 set to be used and set the
41741 The itemize environment is described in section
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41748 reference "sec:Itemize"
41755 \begin_layout Standard
41756 You can furthermore specify a
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41764 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41765 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41772 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41778 \begin_inset space \space{}
41782 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41792 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41793 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41796 \begin_layout Standard
41797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41805 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41809 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41817 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41821 usepackage{textcomp}
41824 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41828 usepackage{amssymb}
41838 \begin_layout Section
41842 \begin_layout Standard
41843 Branches are described in section
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41850 reference "sec:Branches"
41857 \begin_layout Section
41859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41861 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41868 \begin_layout Standard
41869 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41872 \begin_layout Description
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41881 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41901 View Master Document
41902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41909 Update Master Document
41910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41917 menu or the toolbar.
41918 The default is set in
41920 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41921 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41926 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41930 \begin_inset space ~
41934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41936 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41943 \begin_layout Description
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset space ~
41952 Output settings for the menu
41954 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41962 For a detailed description see section
41964 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41977 \begin_layout Description
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41983 \begin_inset space ~
41986 Options offers settings for the export format
41992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42010 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42014 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42018 \begin_inset space ~
42023 settings are described in detail in section
42025 Math Output in XHTML
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42048 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42051 \begin_layout Section
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42066 \begin_layout Standard
42067 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42068 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42069 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42070 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42074 \begin_layout Standard
42075 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42082 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42089 \begin_layout Chapter
42095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42097 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42102 \begin_inset Index idx
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42114 \begin_layout Standard
42115 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42117 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42121 It has the following submenus.
42124 \begin_layout Section
42128 \begin_layout Subsection
42132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42133 User Interface File
42134 \begin_inset Index idx
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42138 Customization ! of toolbars
42144 \begin_inset Index idx
42147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 Customization ! of menus
42156 \begin_layout Standard
42157 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42158 interface (ui) file.
42159 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42167 \begin_layout Description
42172 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42175 \begin_layout Description
42182 the menu entries in popup context menus
42185 \begin_layout Description
42190 specifies the toolbar buttons
42193 \begin_layout Standard
42194 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42195 and edit the entries.
42198 \begin_layout Standard
42199 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42211 entries must be finished with an explicit
42236 and in the case of the
42237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42249 The syntax for the entries is:
42252 \begin_layout Standard
42253 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42283 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42286 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42288 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42310 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42316 \begin_layout Standard
42317 For example, assuming you use the menu
42319 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42322 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42326 \begin_layout Standard
42327 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42351 \begin_layout Standard
42353 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42368 to have the sixth bookmark.
42371 \begin_layout Standard
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42380 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42381 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42382 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42385 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42396 \begin_layout Standard
42399 Enable tool tips in main work area
42401 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42409 \begin_layout Standard
42412 Restore window layouts and geometries
42414 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42415 in the last LyX session.
42418 \begin_layout Standard
42421 Restore cursor positions
42423 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42427 \begin_layout Standard
42430 Load opened files from last session
42432 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42435 \begin_layout Standard
42438 Clear all session information
42440 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42441 of last opened documents, etc.).
42444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42448 name "sub:Backup documents"
42453 \begin_inset Index idx
42456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42468 Backup original documents when saving
42470 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42471 it was saved the last time.
42472 It is stored in the
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42481 \begin_inset space ~
42485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42487 reference "sec:Paths"
42491 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42494 \begin_inset space ~
42500 The backup file has the file extension
42501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42515 \begin_layout Standard
42518 Backup documents, every
42520 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42523 \begin_layout Standard
42526 Save documents compressed by default
42528 always saves files in a compressed format.
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42536 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42539 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42552 Open documents in tabs
42554 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42557 \begin_layout Standard
42562 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42574 reference "sec:Paths"
42578 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42584 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42586 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42589 \begin_layout Standard
42592 Single close-tab button
42594 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42597 \begin_inset Graphics
42598 filename ../images/closetab.png
42605 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42606 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42609 \begin_layout Standard
42610 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42618 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42626 \begin_layout Subsection
42628 \begin_inset Index idx
42631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42640 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42647 \begin_layout Standard
42648 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42651 \begin_layout Standard
42652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42660 This section only deals with the fonts
42665 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42668 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42669 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42681 By default, LyX uses
42697 (depends on the system) as its
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_layout Standard
42717 You can change the font size with the
42724 \begin_layout Standard
42729 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42734 points have the size of 1
42735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42739 \begin_inset space ~
42743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42745 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42750 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42755 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42756 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42762 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42769 \begin_layout Standard
42772 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42774 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42775 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42776 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42777 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42779 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42786 \begin_layout Subsection
42788 \begin_inset Index idx
42791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 \begin_inset Index idx
42801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42811 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42812 the list and selecting the
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 By checking the option
42824 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42827 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42828 \begin_inset space ~
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42837 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42840 \begin_layout Subsection
42842 \begin_inset Index idx
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42858 \begin_layout Standard
42863 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42864 This feature is described in section
42865 \begin_inset space ~
42869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42871 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42879 Checking the option
42882 \begin_inset space ~
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42895 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42898 \begin_layout Section
42900 \begin_inset Index idx
42903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42912 \begin_layout Subsection
42916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42923 Cursor follows scrollbar
42925 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42930 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42931 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42932 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42935 \begin_layout Standard
42938 Scroll below end of document
42940 is self-explanatory.
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42944 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42951 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42953 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42954 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42960 Sort environments alphabetically
42962 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Group environments by their category
42970 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42978 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42993 \begin_layout Standard
42994 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42999 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43000 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43004 \begin_layout Subsection
43006 \begin_inset Index idx
43009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 \begin_inset Index idx
43019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43020 Settings ! Shortcuts
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43033 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43034 Several binding files are available, among them:
43037 \begin_layout Description
43038 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43041 \begin_layout Description
43042 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43054 \begin_layout Description
43055 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43066 \begin_layout Standard
43067 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43072 , and binding files for special languages.
43073 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43078 \begin_inset space \space{}
43082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43090 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43094 \begin_layout Standard
43095 Some binding files, like
43099 , only have a limited scope.
43100 When looking at the end of the file
43104 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43107 \begin_layout Standard
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_inset space ~
43120 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43121 in the selected key binding file.
43124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43128 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43133 \begin_inset Index idx
43136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43137 Key Bindings ! Editing
43145 \begin_layout Standard
43146 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43147 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43148 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43151 Show key-bindings containing
43154 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43155 Insert there for example as keyword
43156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43163 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43164 functions that contain
43165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43173 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43174 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43178 that you will find in the
43185 \begin_layout Standard
43186 For example, to add the shortcut
43194 , select the function and press the
43199 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43200 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43204 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43205 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43206 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43207 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43208 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43213 \begin_layout Standard
43214 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43218 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43220 The syntax of the entries is:
43223 \begin_layout Standard
43229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43247 \begin_layout Subsection
43249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43251 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43256 \begin_inset Index idx
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43266 \begin_inset Index idx
43269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43270 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43278 \begin_layout Standard
43279 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43280 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43281 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43282 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43285 \begin_inset space ~
43289 \begin_inset space ~
43294 and select the keyboard map file named
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43310 keyboard map and, if you use the
43314 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43317 arg "keymap-primary"
43323 arg "keymap-secondary"
43326 respectively or toggle between them with
43329 arg "keymap-toggle"
43335 \begin_layout Standard
43336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43344 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43353 \begin_layout Standard
43354 You can also specify the mouse
43356 Wheel scrolling speed
43359 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43371 \begin_inset space ~
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43380 you can select a key for zooming.
43381 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43384 \begin_layout Subsection
43388 \begin_layout Standard
43389 Input completion is described in section
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43396 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43403 \begin_layout Section
43405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43412 \begin_inset Index idx
43415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43422 \begin_inset Index idx
43425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43437 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43440 \begin_layout Description
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43445 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43446 It is the default when you
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43465 \begin_layout Description
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43470 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43472 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43486 \begin_layout Description
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43491 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43497 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43501 \begin_inset Newline newline
43505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43525 \begin_layout Description
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43531 \begin_inset Index idx
43534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43540 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43541 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43548 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43556 will be used to save the backups.
43557 \begin_inset Newline newline
43560 Backup files have the ending
43561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43571 \begin_layout Description
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43584 \begin_inset space ~
43587 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43588 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43589 \begin_inset Newline newline
43596 You add a BibTeX-database
43601 You can edit this file with the program
43610 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43619 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43624 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43625 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43631 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43632 \begin_inset Newline newline
43635 The pipe is also used for the
43640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43646 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43651 \begin_inset Newline newline
43654 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43655 \begin_inset Newline newline
43671 \begin_layout Description
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43676 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43679 \begin_layout Description
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43684 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43685 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43686 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43689 \begin_layout Description
43691 \begin_inset space ~
43694 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43700 You only need to specify it if you are using
43704 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43710 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43714 \begin_layout Description
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43719 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43720 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43721 where to find it on the system.
43722 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43723 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43732 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43733 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43736 \begin_layout Description
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43741 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43742 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43744 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43746 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43747 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43748 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43749 scanned for the input files.
43750 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43751 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43752 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43753 compilation may fail for some documents.
43756 \begin_layout Section
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 Here you can insert your
43770 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43778 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43782 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43785 \begin_layout Section
43787 \begin_inset Index idx
43790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43791 Language ! Settings
43797 \begin_inset Index idx
43800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43801 Settings ! Language
43809 \begin_layout Subsection
43811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43813 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43820 \begin_layout Description
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43829 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43830 You can find its actual translation status here:
43831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43833 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43840 \begin_layout Description
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43845 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43847 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43848 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43865 The most widespread language package is
43870 \begin_inset Index idx
43873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43874 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43879 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43880 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43881 alternative language package
43886 \begin_inset Index idx
43889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43890 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43895 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43896 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43902 The available selections are described in section
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43909 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43916 \begin_layout Description
43918 \begin_inset space ~
43921 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43922 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43923 An example is the start command
43929 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43934 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43949 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43954 \begin_layout Description
43956 \begin_inset space ~
43964 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43965 command toggles the package on and off.
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43977 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43981 \begin_layout Description
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43990 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43991 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43992 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43993 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44000 \begin_layout Description
44002 \begin_inset space ~
44005 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44007 When this option is not set, the
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44015 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44016 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_layout Description
44029 \begin_inset space ~
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44041 When it is not set, the
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44049 is set to the end of the document.
44052 \begin_layout Description
44054 \begin_inset space ~
44058 \begin_inset space ~
44061 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44062 language will be underlined in blue.
44065 \begin_layout Description
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44074 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44075 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44078 \begin_layout Description
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44083 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44084 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44085 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44086 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44089 \begin_layout Subsection
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44101 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44108 \begin_layout Section
44112 \begin_layout Subsection
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44125 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44128 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44129 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44131 \begin_inset space ~
44137 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44146 \begin_inset Index idx
44149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 \begin_inset Index idx
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44160 Settings ! Date format
44165 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44166 \begin_inset Newline newline
44170 \begin_inset Flex URL
44173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44175 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44181 \begin_inset Newline newline
44184 For example the format
44185 \begin_inset Newline newline
44189 \begin_inset Newline newline
44192 prints the date as day/month/year.
44195 \begin_layout Description
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44204 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44207 \begin_layout Description
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44212 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44214 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44222 For a detailed description see section
44224 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44237 \begin_layout Subsection
44239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44246 \begin_inset Index idx
44249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44256 \begin_inset Index idx
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44268 \begin_layout Description
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44273 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44278 The name will be used when the
44283 \begin_inset Newline newline
44287 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44295 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44303 \begin_layout Description
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44308 command is the command LyX
44309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44316 LaTeX uses for printing.
44324 \begin_layout Description
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44333 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44334 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44335 of the program that provides the
44342 \begin_layout Description
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44348 \begin_inset space ~
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44355 printer This option works only for the
44360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44372 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44373 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44376 \begin_layout Subsection
44381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44391 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44396 \begin_inset Index idx
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44408 \begin_layout Description
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44432 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44437 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44458 are used for Cyrillic.
44459 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44472 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44473 LyX sets up in the background.
44474 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44477 \begin_layout Description
44479 \begin_inset space ~
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44486 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44491 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44494 \begin_layout Description
44496 \begin_inset space ~
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44511 options They only have an effect when the program
44515 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44518 \begin_layout Standard
44519 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44520 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44521 manuals of the applications.
44524 \begin_layout Description
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44529 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44536 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44543 \begin_layout Description
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44548 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44549 \begin_inset space ~
44553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44555 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44562 \begin_layout Description
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44567 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44568 \begin_inset space ~
44572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44574 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44581 \begin_layout Description
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44594 \begin_inset space ~
44597 command Command for the program
44601 that is described in the section
44607 Additional Features
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 There are additionally the following options:
44616 \begin_layout Description
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44637 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44655 to separate folders.
44656 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44657 \begin_inset Index idx
44660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44667 \begin_inset Index idx
44670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 \begin_layout Description
44681 \begin_inset space ~
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44701 \begin_inset space ~
44704 changes Removes all manually set
44710 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44711 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44713 \begin_inset space ~
44718 dialog when changing the document class.
44721 \begin_layout Section
44723 \begin_inset space ~
44727 \begin_inset Index idx
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44739 \begin_layout Subsection
44741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44743 name "sub:Converters"
44748 \begin_inset Index idx
44751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44760 \begin_layout Standard
44761 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44762 from one format to another.
44763 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44764 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44776 field and press the
44781 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44785 \begin_inset space ~
44790 drop-down list, modify the
44794 field and press the
44801 \begin_layout Standard
44804 Converter File Cache
44810 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44812 Maximum Age (in days
44815 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44816 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44821 definition, is described in the section
44832 \begin_layout Subsection
44834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44836 name "sec:File-Formats"
44841 \begin_inset Index idx
44844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44851 \begin_inset Index idx
44854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44873 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44876 \begin_layout Standard
44877 You can also define the
44879 Default output format
44881 that is used when you use
44883 View, Update, View Master Document
44887 Update Master Document
44893 menu or the toolbar.
44896 \begin_layout Standard
44897 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44908 \begin_layout Standard
44909 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44910 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44911 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44912 This is done by specifying a
44917 More about this is described in the section
44928 \begin_layout Chapter
44929 Units available in LyX
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44942 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44949 \begin_layout Standard
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44957 reference "tab:Units"
44961 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44964 \begin_layout Standard
44965 \begin_inset Float table
44971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44990 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 \begin_inset Tabular
44999 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45000 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45001 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45002 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45153 scaled point (65536
45154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45214 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45269 % of original image width
45276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45483 \begin_layout Chapter
45485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45487 name "chap:Credits"
45494 \begin_layout Standard
45495 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45496 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45499 \begin_layout Itemize
45502 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45505 \begin_layout Itemize
45511 \begin_layout Itemize
45517 \begin_layout Itemize
45523 \begin_layout Itemize
45529 \begin_layout Itemize
45535 \begin_layout Itemize
45541 \begin_layout Itemize
45547 \begin_layout Itemize
45550 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45553 \begin_layout Itemize
45559 \begin_layout Itemize
45565 \begin_layout Itemize
45571 \begin_layout Itemize
45577 \begin_layout Itemize
45583 \begin_layout Itemize
45589 \begin_layout Itemize
45595 \begin_layout Itemize
45601 \begin_layout Itemize
45603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45612 \begin_layout Standard
45613 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45616 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45623 \begin_layout Bibliography
45624 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45625 LatexCommand bibitem
45632 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45635 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45640 \begin_inset Newline newline
45644 \begin_inset Flex URL
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45649 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45657 \begin_layout Bibliography
45658 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45659 LatexCommand bibitem
45660 key "latexcompanion"
45664 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45666 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45669 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45672 \begin_layout Bibliography
45673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45674 LatexCommand bibitem
45679 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45682 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45685 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45688 \begin_layout Bibliography
45689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45690 LatexCommand bibitem
45697 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45700 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45703 \begin_layout Bibliography
45704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45705 LatexCommand bibitem
45717 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45720 \begin_layout Bibliography
45721 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45722 LatexCommand bibitem
45728 \begin_inset Newline newline
45732 \begin_inset Flex URL
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45745 \begin_layout Bibliography
45746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45747 LatexCommand bibitem
45753 \begin_inset Newline newline
45757 \begin_inset Flex URL
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45770 \begin_layout Bibliography
45771 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45772 LatexCommand bibitem
45778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45780 name "Documentation"
45781 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45790 \begin_inset Newline newline
45794 \begin_inset Flex URL
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45807 \begin_layout Bibliography
45808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45809 LatexCommand bibitem
45815 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45817 name "Documentation"
45818 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45822 how to use the program
45827 \begin_inset Newline newline
45831 \begin_inset Flex URL
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45844 \begin_layout Bibliography
45845 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45846 LatexCommand bibitem
45852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45854 name "Documentation"
45855 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45864 \begin_inset Newline newline
45868 \begin_inset Flex URL
45871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45873 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45881 \begin_layout Bibliography
45882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45883 LatexCommand bibitem
45889 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45891 name "Documentation"
45892 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45901 \begin_inset Newline newline
45905 \begin_inset Flex URL
45908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45918 \begin_layout Bibliography
45919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45920 LatexCommand bibitem
45926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45928 name "Documentation"
45929 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45933 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45934 \begin_inset Newline newline
45938 \begin_inset Flex URL
45941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45951 \begin_layout Bibliography
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45953 LatexCommand bibitem
45959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45961 name "Documentation"
45962 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45966 of the LaTeX-package
45971 \begin_inset Index idx
45974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45981 \begin_inset Newline newline
45985 \begin_inset Flex URL
45988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45998 \begin_layout Bibliography
45999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46000 LatexCommand bibitem
46006 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46008 name "Documentation"
46009 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46013 of the LaTeX-package
46018 \begin_inset Index idx
46021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46022 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46028 \begin_inset Newline newline
46032 \begin_inset Flex URL
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46045 \begin_layout Bibliography
46046 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46047 LatexCommand bibitem
46053 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46055 name "Documentation"
46056 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46060 of the LaTeX-package
46065 \begin_inset Index idx
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46069 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46075 \begin_inset Newline newline
46079 \begin_inset Flex URL
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46092 \begin_layout Bibliography
46093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46094 LatexCommand bibitem
46100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46102 name "Documentation"
46103 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46107 of the LaTeX-package
46112 \begin_inset Index idx
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46122 \begin_inset Newline newline
46126 \begin_inset Flex URL
46129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46131 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46139 \begin_layout Bibliography
46140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46141 LatexCommand bibitem
46147 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46149 name "Documentation"
46150 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46154 of the LaTeX-package
46159 \begin_inset Index idx
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46169 \begin_inset Newline newline
46173 \begin_inset Flex URL
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46178 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46186 \begin_layout Bibliography
46187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46188 LatexCommand bibitem
46194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46196 name "Documentation"
46197 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46201 of the LaTeX-package
46206 \begin_inset Index idx
46209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46216 \begin_inset Newline newline
46220 \begin_inset Flex URL
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46233 \begin_layout Bibliography
46234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46235 LatexCommand bibitem
46241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46243 name "Documentation"
46244 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46248 of the LaTeX-package
46253 \begin_inset Index idx
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46263 \begin_inset Newline newline
46267 \begin_inset Flex URL
46270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46280 \begin_layout Bibliography
46281 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46282 LatexCommand bibitem
46288 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46291 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46295 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46296 \begin_inset Newline newline
46300 \begin_inset Flex URL
46303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46313 \begin_layout Bibliography
46314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46315 LatexCommand bibitem
46321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46324 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46328 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46329 \begin_inset Newline newline
46333 \begin_inset Flex URL
46336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46338 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46346 \begin_layout Bibliography
46347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46348 LatexCommand bibitem
46354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46357 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46361 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46362 \begin_inset Newline newline
46366 \begin_inset Flex URL
46369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46371 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46379 \begin_layout Bibliography
46380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46381 LatexCommand bibitem
46387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46390 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46394 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46395 \begin_inset Newline newline
46399 \begin_inset Flex URL
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46404 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46412 \begin_layout Bibliography
46413 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46414 LatexCommand bibitem
46420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46423 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46427 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46428 \begin_inset Newline newline
46432 \begin_inset Flex URL
46435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46437 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46445 \begin_layout Bibliography
46446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46447 LatexCommand bibitem
46453 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46456 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46460 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46461 \begin_inset Newline newline
46465 \begin_inset Flex URL
46468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46478 \begin_layout Bibliography
46479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46480 LatexCommand bibitem
46486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46489 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46493 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46494 \begin_inset Newline newline
46498 \begin_inset Flex URL
46501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46503 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46511 \begin_layout Bibliography
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46513 LatexCommand bibitem
46519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46522 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46526 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46527 \begin_inset Newline newline
46531 \begin_inset Flex URL
46534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46536 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46544 \begin_layout Bibliography
46545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46546 LatexCommand bibitem
46552 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46555 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46559 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46560 \begin_inset Newline newline
46564 \begin_inset Flex URL
46567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46569 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46577 \begin_layout Bibliography
46578 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46579 LatexCommand bibitem
46585 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46588 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46592 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46593 \begin_inset Newline newline
46597 \begin_inset Flex URL
46600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46602 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46610 \begin_layout Bibliography
46611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46612 LatexCommand bibitem
46618 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46621 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46625 about new features in
46630 \begin_inset Newline newline
46634 \begin_inset Flex URL
46637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46639 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46647 \begin_layout Standard
46648 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46682 \begin_inset Note Note
46685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46692 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46693 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46694 bibliography is the second one:
46702 \begin_layout Standard
46703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46704 LatexCommand bibtex
46705 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46706 options "biblio/alphadin"
46713 \begin_layout Standard
46714 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46717 \begin_layout Standard
46718 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46719 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46725 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46726 LatexCommand printindex